203
GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Issue 02 Date 2012-10-15 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

Embed Size (px)

DESCRIPTION

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

Citation preview

Page 1: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0

Basic Feature Description

Issue 02

Date 2012-10-15

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Page 2: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 2 of 203

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice

The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the commercial contract made between

Huawei and the customer. All or partial products, services and features described in this document may not

be within the purchased scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise agreed by the contract, all

statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the

preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang

Shenzhen 518129

People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Page 3: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 3 of 203

Contents

1 Basic Features ............................................................................................................................ 7

1.1 System Improvement ................................................................................................................................. 7

1.1.1 GBFD-110000 GBSS9.0 System Improvement ................................................................................. 7

1.1.2 GBFD-110001 GBSS12.0 System Improvement................................................................................ 8

1.1.3 GBFD-110030 3GPP Protocol Compliance ......................................................................................10

1.1.4 GBFD-110002 GBSS13.0 System Improvement............................................................................... 11

1.1.5 GBFD-110003 GBSS14.0 System Improvement...............................................................................12

1.2 Radio Service Function .............................................................................................................................13

1.2.1 GBFD-110101 Frequency Band .......................................................................................................13

1.2.2 GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC ...................................................................................15

1.2.3 GBFD-114901 Support for E-GSM and R-GSM Frequency Band .....................................................16

1.2.4 GBFD-110201 Telephone Service (TS11) .........................................................................................17

1.2.5 GBFD-110202 Emergency Call Service (TS12) ................................................................................18

1.2.6 GBFD-110203 Point To Point Short Message Service (TS21, TS22) .................................................19

1.2.7 GBFD-110204 G3 Fax (TS61, TS62) ...............................................................................................21

1.2.8 GBFD-110205 Bearer Service (CSD) ...............................................................................................22

1.3 Mobility Management...............................................................................................................................23

1.3.1 GBFD-110301 Location Updating ....................................................................................................23

1.3.2 GBFD-110302 IMSI Detach ............................................................................................................25

1.3.3 GBFD-110303 CS Paging ................................................................................................................26

1.3.4 GBFD-110304 Authentication ..........................................................................................................28

1.3.5 GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover ...............................................................................................29

1.3.6 GBFD-110607 Direct Retry .............................................................................................................32

1.3.7 GBFD-110608 SDCCH Handover ....................................................................................................34

1.3.8 GBFD-110401 Basic Cell Selection .................................................................................................35

1.3.9 GBFD-110402 Basic Cell Re-selection.............................................................................................36

1.4 Connection Management ..........................................................................................................................38

1.4.1 GBFD-110501 Call Control .............................................................................................................38

1.4.2 GBFD-110502 Assignment and Immediate Assignment ....................................................................39

1.4.3 GBFD-110503 Call Reestablishment ................................................................................................41

1.4.4 GBFD-112501 TCH Re-assignment .................................................................................................42

1.4.5 GBFD-119202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS ..............................................................43

1.5 Radio Resource Management ....................................................................................................................44

Page 4: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 4 of 203

1.5.1 GBFD-111001 TRX Management ....................................................................................................44

1.5.2 GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management ..........................................................................................46

1.5.3 GBFD-111003 Radio Common Channel Management ......................................................................47

1.5.4 GBFD-111004 Radio Dedicated Channel Management .....................................................................49

1.5.5 GBFD-111005 Enhanced Channel Assignment Algorithm ................................................................50

1.6 Operation and Maintenance ......................................................................................................................52

1.6.1 MRFD-210301 Configuration Management .....................................................................................52

1.6.2 MRFD-210302 Performance Management .......................................................................................55

1.6.3 MRFD-210303 Inventory Management ............................................................................................58

1.6.4 MRFD-210304 Faulty Management .................................................................................................60

1.6.5 MRFD-210305 Security Management ..............................................................................................64

1.6.6 MRFD-210309 DBS Topology Maintenance ....................................................................................65

1.6.7 MRFD-210310 BTS/NodeB Software USB Download .....................................................................67

1.6.8 GBFD-111202 O&M of BTS ...........................................................................................................68

1.6.9 GBFD-111203 O&M of BSC ...........................................................................................................70

1.6.10 GBFD-111207 BTS Test Function ..................................................................................................72

1.6.11 GBFD-111210 Integrated Network Management Interface ..............................................................75

1.6.12 GBFD-116501 Man Machine Language (MML) .............................................................................76

1.6.13 GBFD-116402 Maintenance Mode Alarm ......................................................................................78

1.6.14 GBFD-113523 NAT Beside OM .....................................................................................................79

1.7 Software Management ..............................................................................................................................80

1.7.1 MRFD-210401 BSC/RNC Software Management ............................................................................80

1.7.2 MRFD-210402 BTS/NodeB Software Management .........................................................................81

1.7.3 GBFD-111213 Remote Upgrade of the BSC&BTS Software ............................................................83

1.7.4 MRFD-210403 License Management ...............................................................................................85

1.8 GBSS Network Architecture .....................................................................................................................87

1.8.1 GBFD-114601 Multi-Cell Function ..................................................................................................87

1.8.2 GBFD-111501 BTS Combined Cabinet ............................................................................................88

1.8.3 GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group ......................................................................................89

1.8.4 GBFD-118801 BSC Cabinet/Subrack Sharing ..................................................................................90

1.8.5 MBFD-210204 Star Topology ..........................................................................................................91

1.8.6 MBFD-210205 Chain Topology .......................................................................................................92

1.8.7 MBFD-210206 Tree Topology .........................................................................................................93

1.8.8 GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP ..................................................................................94

1.9 System Reliability ....................................................................................................................................95

1.9.1 GBFD-111701 Board Switchover .....................................................................................................95

1.9.2 GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control ...................................................................................................96

1.9.3 GBFD-112301 Remote EAC Maintenance .......................................................................................98

1.9.4 GBFD-111214 Operation & Maintenance System One-Key Recovery ..............................................99

1.9.5 GBFD-111211 Reporting the Temperature List of the BTS Equipment Room.................................. 100

1.9.6 MRFD-210101 System Redundancy .............................................................................................. 101

1.9.7 MRFD-210102 Operate System Security Management ................................................................... 102

Page 5: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 5 of 203

1.9.8 MRFD-210103 Link Aggregation................................................................................................... 104

1.9.9 MRFD-210104 BSC/RNC Resource Sharing .................................................................................. 105

1.9.10 GBFD-117804 Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure ................................................. 106

1.9.11 GBFD-511003 Call-Based Flow Control ...................................................................................... 107

1.10 Basic features ....................................................................................................................................... 108

1.10.1 GBFD-110901 Adjustment of Adaptive Timing Advance .............................................................. 108

1.10.2 GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement Report ....................................................................... 109

1.10.3 GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report ................................................................. 110

1.10.4 GBFD-111101 System Information Sending ................................................................................. 111

1.10.5 GBFD-111102 Forced System Information Sending by OMC ....................................................... 113

1.10.6 GBFD-111901 Supporting Three-Digit MNC ............................................................................... 114

1.10.7 GBFD-116101 Support of Daylight Saving Time .......................................................................... 115

1.10.8 GBFD-113001 SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment .............................................................................. 116

1.10.9 GBFD-112401 Cell Frequency Scan ............................................................................................. 117

1.10.10 GBFD-111806 STP (Signaling Transport Point) .......................................................................... 118

1.10.11 GBFD-111802 14-Digit Signaling Point Code ............................................................................ 119

1.10.12 MRFD-210801 Interface Message Tracing ................................................................................. 121

1.10.13 MRFD-210802 User Signaling Tracing ...................................................................................... 122

1.10.14 GBFD-112203 Cell Tracing........................................................................................................ 123

1.10.15 GBFD-111301 LAPD Multiplexing at Abis Interface .................................................................. 124

1.10.16 GBFD-114802 Discontinuous Reception (DRX) ......................................................................... 126

1.10.17 GBFD-111601 BTS Power Management .................................................................................... 127

1.10.18 GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm .................................................................... 128

1.10.19 GBFD-113525 DTMF Downlink Message Filter ........................................................................ 131

1.10.20 GBFD-115201 High Speed Signaling ......................................................................................... 131

1.10.21 GBFD-110521 Guaranteed Emergency Call................................................................................ 133

1.10.22 GBFD-511001 License Control for Urgency ............................................................................... 134

1.10.23 GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm ............................................................... 135

1.11 Interface Features.................................................................................................................................. 136

1.11.1 GBFD-111801 Ater Interface 4:1 Multiplexing ............................................................................. 136

1.11.2 GBFD-119001 Gb Interface Function ........................................................................................... 138

1.11.3 GBFD-111803 A Interface Circuit Management ............................................................................ 139

1.11.4 GBFD-111804 A Interface Protocol Process.................................................................................. 141

1.11.5 GBFD-111805 A Interface Occupation Rate Monitoring ............................................................... 142

1.11.6 GBFD-113904 Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface ................................................................ 143

1.12 PS Services Features ............................................................................................................................. 144

1.12.1 GBFD-119101 Packet Channel Combination Type ....................................................................... 144

1.12.2 GBFD-119102 Packet System Information ................................................................................... 146

1.12.3 GBFD-119103 MS Types ............................................................................................................. 147

1.12.4 GBFD-119104 MAC Mode .......................................................................................................... 148

1.12.5 GBFD-119105 RLC Mode ........................................................................................................... 150

1.12.6 GBFD-119106 Coding Scheme .................................................................................................... 151

Page 6: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 6 of 203

1.12.7 GBFD-119107 Networking Control Mode .................................................................................... 152

1.12.8 GBFD-119108 Network Operation Mode Support ........................................................................ 153

1.12.9 GBFD-119109 QoS (Best Effort) ................................................................................................. 155

1.12.10 GBFD-119110 Access ................................................................................................................ 156

1.12.11 GBFD-119111 Assignment ......................................................................................................... 157

1.12.12 GBFD-119112 PS Paging ........................................................................................................... 158

1.12.13 GBFD-119113 Timing Advance Update ..................................................................................... 160

1.12.14 GBFD-119115 Power Control .................................................................................................... 161

1.12.15 GBFD-119116 Uplink Flow Control ........................................................................................... 162

1.12.16 GBFD-119117 Flow Control on Gb Interface ............................................................................. 163

1.12.17 GBFD-113101 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment ............................................................................... 165

1.12.18 GBFD-119205 Dynamically Adjusting the RRBP Frequency ...................................................... 167

1.12.19 GBFD-119303 Load Sharing ...................................................................................................... 168

1.12.20 GBFD-119501 Adaptive Adjustment of Uplink and Downlink Channels ..................................... 170

1.13 Antenna System Solution ...................................................................................................................... 171

1.13.1 MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier) .............................................. 171

1.13.2 MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt .......................................................................................... 173

1.13.3 MRFD-210604 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity ........................................................................ 176

1.14 Synchronization Mechanism ................................................................................................................. 177

1.14.1 MRFD-210501 BTS/NodeB Clock ............................................................................................... 177

1.14.2 MRFD-210502 BSC/RNC Clock ................................................................................................. 178

1.15 Maintainability and Testing ................................................................................................................... 180

1.15.1 GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis ........................................................................................... 180

1.15.2 GBFD-119306 Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis ................................................................................. 181

1.15.3 GBFD-119307 Spectrum Scan ..................................................................................................... 182

1.15.4 GBFD-119308 Intermodulation Testing ........................................................................................ 183

1.15.5 GBFD-118607 IP Performance Monitor ....................................................................................... 184

1.15.6 GBFD-118614 GSM PS Service Map ........................................................................................... 186

1.16 Documentation ..................................................................................................................................... 187

1.16.1 MRFD-210701 Documentation .................................................................................................... 187

A Acronyms and Abbreviations ............................................................................................ 190

Page 7: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 7 of 203

1 Basic Features

1.1 System Improvement

1.1.1 GBFD-110000 GBSS9.0 System Improvement

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS9.0.

Summary

The GBSS9.0 complies with the 3GPP R6. When using new signaling processing board and

interface boards, the GBSC supports up to 3072 TRXs and the GSM network can evolve to

the UMTS network.

Benefits

With this feature, the BSC of large capacity is provided. Therefore, the equipment footprint,

the O&M cost, the power consumption, and the CAPEX and OPEX are reduced.

The MBSC can be enabled with this feature. This makes it easy for the GSM network to

evolve to the UMTS network.

Description

The GBSS9.0 complies with the 3GPP R6 and provides the following enhancements:

1. The BSC supports up to 3072 TRXs.

2. The newly introduced signaling processing board XPUb and interface boards POUc,

GOUc, and FG2c improve the processing capability of boards.

3. This feature supports the MBSC. In this way, the network can be configured as GSM

only, UMTS only, or GSM&UMTS. The switching among these three configurations is

easy. Therefore, a smooth evolution from GSM to GSM&UMTS to UMTS is achieved.

4. In MBSC mode, co-O&M, co-radio resources management, co-IP transmission, and

co-hardware equipment are supported.

5. GBSS9.0 supports EDGE+ Evolution, including Uplink EGPRS2-A, Downlink EGPRS2-A, MSRD, Dual Carriers in Downlink, and Latency Reduction.

Page 8: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 8 of 203

6. GBSS9.0 supports IP Enhancement, including A IP over E1/T1, Abis IP over E1/T1,

UDP MUX for A Transmission, A over IP, and 3GPP Protocol Compliance.

7. GBSS9.0 supports voice quality improvement, including AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi

Rate Wide Band), Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC), and Enhancement Packet

Loss Concealment (EPLC).

8. GBSS9.0 supports EGPRS Service Enhancement, including Conversational QoS, PS

Handover, and Early TBF Establishment.

9. GBSS9.0 supports Dynamic Cell Power Off for energy saving.

10. GBSS9.0 supports Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure for improving the

system reliability.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

The XPUb board is introduced for signaling processing.

The interface boards POUc, GOUc, and FG2c are introduced.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.1.2 GBFD-110001 GBSS12.0 System Improvement

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS12.0.

Summary

This feature provides the following enhancements in GBSS12.0:

Increased system capacity

Support of more network topologies

Improved reliability of the network topologies

Improved maintainability and testability

Page 9: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 9 of 203

Benefits The system capacity is increased in GBSS12.0, and less equipment can be used to

provide the same capacity as before. Therefore, the required footprint in the equipment room and the power consumed by each TRX are reduced.

GBSS12.0 supports more network topologies to meet the trend of all-IP network.

The reliability of the network topologies is improved in GBSS12.0. In this way, the reliability of the GBSS system is improved in the case of sudden traffic burst.

The operation and maintenance efficiency is improved in GBSS12.0.

Description

The System Improvement of GBSS12.0 feature is described as follows:

1. The capacity of the BSC system is increased.

In full configuration, the BSC supports 4,096 TRXs and a traffic volume of 24,000 Erlang.

2. The BSC of GBSS12.0 supports more network topologies.

The A interface supports TDM/IP dual stack and supports the gradual evolution from A over

TDM to A over IP.

3. The reliability of the network topologies is improved.

Various flow control measures are taken to improve the reliability of the GBSS system in the

case of sudden traffic burst.

4. The maintainability and testability are improved.

To improve the operation and maintenance efficiency, GBSS12.0 provides fault detection

measures to detect the fault in speech services. In this way, a problem on the existing network

can be quickly identified.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

Page 10: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 10 of 203

1.1.3 GBFD-110030 3GPP Protocol Compliance

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Huawei GBSS equipment complies with the 3GPP specifications.

Benefits

In compliance with the 3GPP R6, this feature enables the BSC interwork with other network

elements 9NEs) that comply with the 3GPP R99, R4, R5, or R6. With this feature, the BSC

can provide diverse services with optimal performance for the subscribers and improves the

competitiveness of operators.

Description

GBSS6.1 complies with the 3GPP R99/R4.

Enhancement

GBSS7.0 complies with the 3GPP R99/R4.

GBSS8.0 complies with the 3GPP R99/R4.

GBSS8.1 complies with the 3GPP R99/R4.

GBSS9.0 complies with the 3GPP R99/R4/R5/R6.

GBSS12.0 complies with the 3GPP R99/R4/R5/R6.

GBSS13.0 complies with the 3GPP R99/R4/R5/R6/R8.

GBSS14.0 complies with the 3GPP R99/R4/R5/R6/R8/R9.

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

If new features defined in the 3GPP R6 need to be provided, the MSC and MS must comply

with the related specifications.

Page 11: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 11 of 203

1.1.4 GBFD-110002 GBSS13.0 System Improvement

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS13.0.

Summary

This feature provides the following enhancements in GBSS13.0:

Use a new TC board (DPUf) and enhanced system integration

Support for VAMOS

Improved voice quality and support of the E-coder, EPLC, EVAD

Support for identification of instant messaging services

Improved transmission efficiency and support for Abis IPHC (IP header compression) and Abis PPP multiplexing.

Enhanced maintainability and testability

Benefits

A BSC cabinet supports a maximum of 4,096 TRXs. This reduces the footprint in the equipment room and reduces the power consumption per TRX.

The VAMOS solution is provided, which improves the spectral efficiency and network

capacity.

The voice quality is improved, which enhances the customer satisfaction.

Identification of packet services improves the radio resource efficiency and increases the

income of data services for operators.

The Abis transmission solution enhances the transmission efficiency.

The maintainability and testability improve the OM efficiency and network security.

Description

The System Improvement of GBSS13.0 feature is described as follows:

1. The integration of the BSC system is enhanced.

A new TC board DPUf is introduced. In full configuration, a BSC cabinet supports 4,096

TRXs and a traffic volume of 24,000 Erlang.

2. The spectral efficiency and system capacity is increased.

With the increasing number of radio voice users and the 900 MHz refarming started in cities

of some countries, the GSM spectral resources may be limited. The VAMOS solution

supported by GBSS13.0 improves spectral efficiency, relieving the limitation on system

capacity.

3. The voice quality is enhanced.

The E-coder function is supported. The voice experience and MOS of users are improved by

optimizing the voice coding and decoding algorithms of EFR, AMR users. In addition,

identification of ring back tone and music is enhanced through the improved VAD technology:

music identification rate > 99%; improvement of the subjective MOS of the ring back tone > 0.1.

Page 12: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 12 of 203

4. The transmission efficiency is improved.

The Abis IP HC (IP header compression) and Abis PPP multiplexing are supported to improve

the transmission efficiency at on the Abis interface.

5. The maintainability and testability are improved.

The OM and fault location functions, such as BTS antenna FDR fault detection, real-time

monitoring of IP transmission status, and automatic configuration of the IP addresses, are

supported to improve the OM efficiency.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A new TC board DPUf is added.

Dependency on BTS hardware

None

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.1.5 GBFD-110003 GBSS14.0 System Improvement

Availability

This feature is introduced in GBSS14.0.

Summary

The GBSS14.0 System Improvement feature provides the following functions:

Increases the system capacity.

Decreases the number of BTS migrations that are caused by internal problems.

Improves the control-plane load balancing capability.

Benefits

Reduces the space required in the equipment room and the power consumed by each

TRX by improving system capacity.

Decreases the number of BTS migrations.

Page 13: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 13 of 203

Balances the load on the control plane and fully utilizes the control-plane hardware

capability.

Description

System improvements in GBSS14.0 are as follows:

In all IP mode, a BSC in full configuration supports a maximum of 8192 TRXs and

45,000 Erlangs.

Transmission resource management for the MPU board is optimized. After optimization,

the loads among multiple MPU boards can be shared by call.This reduces the probability

that a BTS is relocated due to imbalanced loads among the MPU boards.

CPU loads on control-plane boards are balanced, maximizing the control-plane

processing capability.

The DPUe, FG2d, and GOUd boards are added to replace the DPUg, FG2a, and GOUa

boards, respectively.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

The DPUe, FG2d, and GOUd boards are added.

Dependency on BTS hardware

None

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.2 Radio Service Function

1.2.1 GBFD-110101 Frequency Band

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Huawei GBSS equipment supports the following frequency bands: GSM850, GSM900,

DCS1800, and PCS1900.

Page 14: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 14 of 203

Benefits

With this feature, the BTS supports multiple frequency bands and therefore TRXs of different

frequency bands can be inserted into the slots in the same cabinet. In this way, the number of

required cabinets and the area required for the equipment room are reduced.

GBSS equipment supports multiple frequency bands. Therefore, the GSM network can be

deployed with different frequency bands to meet the requirements of operators.

Description

The following table lists the frequency bands supported by Huawei GBSS equipment.

Frequency Band

Uplink Frequency (MS TX, BTS RX)

Downlink Frequency (BTS TX, MS RX)

ARFCN

850 MHz 824–849 MHz 869–894 MHz 128–251

900 MHz

(P-GSM)

890–915 MHz 935–960 MHz 1–124

1800 MHz 1710–1785 MHz 1805–1880 MHz 512–885

1900 MHz 1850–1910 MHz 1930–1990 MHz 512–810

The GSM900 frequency band contains the standard P-GSM and extended E-GSM and

R-GSM. The GSM900 listed in the preceding table refers to P-GSM. For details of E-GSM

and R-GSM, see the optional feature GBFD-114901 "Support for E-GSM and R-GSM

Frequency Band."

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

Page 15: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 15 of 203

1.2.2 GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Multi-band sharing one BSC enables operators to deploy a multi-band network, that is, one

BSC supports multiple bands. This feature enables operators to expand frequency bands, and

therefore alleviates the problem of insufficient frequency resources.

Benefits

Multi-band sharing one BSC enables a network to support multiple frequency bands and

enables operators to expand frequency bands.

Description

Huawei GBSS supports GSM900, DCS1800, PCS1900, and GSM850. Huawei GBSS

supports multi-band network sharing one BSC. DCS1800 and PCS1900, when these two

frequency bands build a multi-band network, some restriction list below:

DCS1800 cell and PCS1900 cell cannot be configured as neighboring cell

One cell's neighboring cell cannot have DCS1800 cell and PCS1900 cell at the same time

Huawei GBSS supports the following types of multi-band networks:

GSM850+GSM900+DCS1800

GSM850+GSM900+PCS1900

In a multi-band network, the parameters associated with the cell selection and handover can

be set according to the specific frequency band so that the strategies of cell selection, cell

reselection, and handover between different bands can be implemented.

The dual-band network is the most common multi-band network. The dual-band network

consists of two types: GSM900+DCS1800 and GSM850+PCS1900.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Page 16: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 16 of 203

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.2.3 GBFD-114901 Support for E-GSM and R-GSM Frequency Band

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Huawei GBSS equipment supports the E-GSM900 and R-GSM900 frequency bands.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature enables services to be processed on the extended frequency bands and extends

the frequency range.

The state radio regulatory commission of each country is responsible for the division and

selling of the frequency resources of the country. The GSM900 is the commonly used

frequency band. To fully utilize frequency resources, the P-GSM900 frequency band is

extended to bring more benefits to governments and operators.

In this way, the related government organizations can make profits by selling this frequency

band.

In addition, the operators obtain more radio resources and make more profits by providing

better services to end users.

Description

The operating frequency of E-GSM (including the standard GSM900) is as follows:

Uplink: 880–915 MHz

Downlink: 925–960 MHz

ARFCN: 0–124, 975–1023

The operating frequency of R-GSM (dedicated to the railway communications) is as follows:

Uplink: 876–915 MHz

Downlink: 921–960 MHz

ARFCN: 0–124, 955–1023

The E-GSM900, R-GSM900, and P-GSM900 belong to the same frequency band while their

frequencies are not adjacent. Therefore, the extended frequency bands of E-GSM and R-GSM

are introduced. The E-GSM extended frequency band refers to the E-GSM frequency band

excluding the P-GSM frequency band. The R-GSM extended frequency band refers to the

R-GSM frequency band excluding the E-GSM frequency band.

Page 17: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 17 of 203

For the cells configured with E-GSM extended frequency band or R-GSM frequency band,

the system adopts different channel assignment strategies according to the frequency band

supporting capability of the MS and the channel.

During the immediate assignment, the system assigns a channel to the MS based on the

frequency band supported by the BCCH carrier. When assigning a channel, the system obtains

the classmark of the MS and then determines whether a channel is supported by the MS.

Among all the channels supported by the MS, the system preferentially assigns a channel that

is not in the intersection of the frequency bands to the MS. For example, if an MS supports

the E-GSM band, and the available channels are carried on the P-GSM band and the E-GSM

extended band, the system preferentially assigns the channel on the E-GSM extended band to

the MS. The band intersection, that is, P-GSM band, is reserved for other MSs with weak

multiband capability.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

E-GSM and R-GSM should be support by MS.

1.2.4 GBFD-110201 Telephone Service (TS11)

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Huawei GBSS supports the telephone service (TS11) specified in GSM specifications.

The telephone service can be classified into mobile-originated calls (MOC) and

mobile-terminated calls (MTC). The full rate (FR) speech coding is adopted by default. The

speech calls can be made not only between MSs within a GSM PLMN, but also between a

PLMN MS and a subscriber of PSTN or other communication networks.

Benefits

Telephone service is a basic speech service specified in GSM specifications. It is also one of

the basic speech service functions provided by the operators. The excellent speech service provided by Huawei BSS provides the following benefits:

Page 18: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 18 of 203

Telephone services with high quality, hence better user experience for subscribers

Better brand reputation, hence increase in the operators' profit

Description

Telephone service (TS11) specified in GSM specifications is a basic function of the GSM

equipment. It is also a basic service provided by Huawei GBSS.

In terms of the called party, the telephone service is classified into MOCs and MTCs. The

telephone service supports the speech calls between MSs within a GSM PLMN, also between

a PLMN MS and a subscriber of PSTN or other communication networks.

In the BSS, the transcoder & rate adaptation unit (TRAU) is responsible for the speech

conversion between the GSM speech codings and the 64 kbit/s PCM coding. If the speech

coding schemes specified in optional features are not activated for a common call, the full rate

speech coding is adopted by default.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.2.5 GBFD-110202 Emergency Call Service (TS12)

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Huawei GBSS supports the emergency call service (TS12) specified in GSM specifications

and provides higher priority for the emergency call service.

Benefits

Emergency call service enables a subscriber to contact local services for assistance in case of

emergency. For subscribers in emergencies, the emergency call service is of great importance.

Page 19: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 19 of 203

During an emergency, the subscriber can dial the specified emergency service number

free of charge for assistance even if the MS is suspended or the subscriber is a defaulting subscriber.

The emergency call service takes precedence over other services in accessing the

network. Even located in congested cells, the subscriber can contact the aid agencies by

dialing the emergency service number.

Description

Emergency call service (TS12) specified in GSM specifications is a basic function of the

GSM equipment. It is also a basic service provided by Huawei GBSS.

The emergency call takes precedence over common calls. Compared with common calls, the

procedure of the emergency call is simplified to accelerate the call establishment and to

ensure a higher call establishment success rate. For example, during the immediate

assignment procedure, a traffic channel (TCH) can be assigned directly so that an emergency

call can be quickly and easily allocated with radio resources.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.2.6 GBFD-110203 Point To Point Short Message Service (TS21, TS22)

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Huawei GBSS supports the TS21 and TS22 services specified in GSM specifications, that is,

the sending and receiving of short messages.

Page 20: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 20 of 203

Benefits

The point-to-point short message service is more and more widely used in daily life and work.

As a value-added service, the short message service is a complement to the non-diversified

mobile speech services of the GSM. The MS can exchange information with other MSs by

using the point-to-point short message services.

This feature provides the following benefits:

The point-to-point short message service meets the subscribers' increasingly diversified

data service requirements.

The point-to-point short message service has become an increasingly important source of operators' revenue and makes the operators' profit more diversified.

The point-to-point short message service can be provided as the SP service to enrich the operating of the operators.

Description

Mobile-terminated (MT) point-to-point short message service (TS11) and mobile-originated

(MO) point-to-point short message service (TS12) specified in GSM specifications are basic

functions of the GSM equipment. They are also basic services provided by Huawei GBSS.

The point-to-point short message service can be used to exchange information in plain text.

With this service, the subscribers can exchange simple information with each other and the

operators can send service promotion information and sale information. Both the short

message center (SMC) and the MS can initiate the point-to-point short message service. The

BSS supports the sending and receiving of the short messages. On receiving the signaling of a

short message from the MSC, the BSS forwards the short message to the MS. In turn, on

receiving a short message from the MS, the BSS forwards the short message to the MSC.

The short message here refers to the one that is transmitted through SS7 signaling. The short

message service implemented in the PS domain is not included. The PS short message is a

function mainly implemented by the SGSN. The PS short message is treated as a common

data service on the BSC side.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

The SMS center is needed.

Page 21: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 21 of 203

1.2.7 GBFD-110204 G3 Fax (TS61, TS62)

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Huawei GBSS supports the TS61 and TS62 services specified in GSM specifications. TS61

refers to the G3 alternate voice and fax service and TS62 refers to the G3 automatic voice and

fax service. The TS61 and TS62 enable the MS to send and receive the fax.

Benefits

The G3 fax feature is a value-added mobile data service that allows MSs to send and receive

the voice fax. The G3 fax feature complements the non-diversified mobile speech service of

the GSM and enables MSs to carry out fax services.

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature enables the MS to receive and send fax any time anywhere and meets the

diversified requirements of the subscribers.

This feature enabled operators to provide mobile fax service to extend the service range and the source of revenue.

Description

TS61 fax and TS62 fax services specified in GSM specifications are basic functions of the

GSM equipment. They are also basic services provided by Huawei GBSS.

With the TS61 fax and TS62 fax services, the MS can send and receive the voice fax.

The fax service is realized through other upper-layer protocols. Therefore, the BSS provides

the lower-layer connection but does not process the upper-layer services.

The main device required by this feature is deployed in the CN.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

Page 22: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 22 of 203

The MS and CN must support this feature.

1.2.8 GBFD-110205 Bearer Service (CSD)

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Huawei BSS supports the traditional CSD services and the data services of multiple rates.

Benefits

Both CSD and GPRS are the standard 2G data services.

Data services are more and more widely used in daily life and work. As a value-added mobile

data service, CSD complements the non-diversified GSM mobile speech services to some

extent. With the CSD service, the MS can connect to the operators' data network or even to

the Internet.

This feature provides the following benefits:

The CSD service meets the subscribers' increasingly diversified data service requirements. The CSD service also enables data transfer between networks.

The CSD service has become an increasingly important source of operators' revenue and increases the operators' profit.

Operators can provide diversified services on the data platform of CSD to attract more subscribers, thereby achieving more profit.

Unlike GPRS, CSD does not require the change of the existing BSS hardware. Instead,

CSD can be implemented directly in the existing system without adding the PCU device

or hardware and software. This reduces the space required by the equipment room and

facilitates the management of the equipment room. Moreover, the CSD increases the

choices of data services.

Description

Huawei GBSS supports various bearer services specified in GSM specifications. The GBSS

provides the lower-layer connection but does not process the upper-layer services. The bearer

service can be used in low-rate data service applications. Huawei GBSS supports the

following bearer services:

BS21 asynchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 300 bit/s

BS22 asynchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 1200 bit/s

BS23 asynchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 1200/75 bit/s (Remark 1)

BS24 asynchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 2400 bit/s

BS25 asynchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 4800 bit/s

BS26 asynchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 9600 bit/s

BS31 synchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 1200 bit/s

BS32 synchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 2400 bit/s

BS33 synchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 4800 bit/s

Page 23: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 23 of 203

BS34 synchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 9600 bit/s

BS41 PAD access service, asynchronous circuit, transparent/nontransparent, 300 bit/s

BS42 PAD access service, asynchronous circuit, transparent/nontransparent, 1200 bit/s

BS43 PAD access service, asynchronous circuit, transparent/nontransparent, 1200/75

bit/s (Remark 1)

BS44 PAD access service, asynchronous circuit, transparent/nontransparent, 2400 bit/s

BS45 PAD access service, asynchronous circuit, transparent/nontransparent, 4800 bit/s

BS46 PAD access service, asynchronous circuit, transparent/nontransparent, 9600 bit/s

BS51 packet access service, 2.4 kbit/s, synchronous, UDI, nontransparent

BS52 packet access service, 4.8 kbit/s, synchronous, UDI, nontransparent

BS53 packet access service, 9.6 kbit/s, synchronous, UDI, nontransparent

BS61 alternate speech/data service, transparent/nontransparent

BS81 speech followed by data service

Remark 1: Bearer services BS23 and BS43 are applicable to the MOC only. In BS23 and

BS43 services, the data rate of 75 bit/s is applicable to the uplink and the data rate of 1200

bit/s is applicable to the downlink.

Enhancement

GBSS8.0

The service of 14.4 kbit/s is realized as an optional feature GBFD-119405 14.4kbit/s Circuit

Switched Data in GBSS8.0.

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.3 Mobility Management

1.3.1 GBFD-110301 Location Updating

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Page 24: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 24 of 203

Summary

To ensure that services such as paging service can be processed normally, the network needs

to know the location of the MS. The MS registers to the network through the location

updating procedure. In this way, the VLR and HLR keep track of the location information

about the MS, ensuring the normal communication of MSs.

Benefits

Location updating is a basic feature for operators to provide the CS speech services.

Description

The location updating procedure is the signaling procedure for the MS to update the location

information on the network. This ensures that the location information about the MS stored in

the HLR and VLR is consistent with the actual location information about the MS.

The general location updating procedure is as follows:

1. The MS initiates the access request with the location updating as the access cause;

2. The network side allocates a signaling channel to the MS;

3. The MS sends a location updating request on this signaling channel;

4. The NSS side determines whether to accept the location updating request based on the

identity of the MS.

In different scenarios, three types of specific location updating procedures are initiated:

normal location updating, periodic location updating, and IMSI attach location updating.

Normal location updating

When the location of an MS changes, the MS initiates a normal location updating

procedure. During the normal location updating procedure, the network side may initiate

other supplementary procedures, such as the classmark interrogation, identification request, authentication, and ciphering mode setting.

Periodic location updating

When timer T3212 expires, the MS initiates the periodic updating procedure. The value

of T3212 is provided by the network in the system information type 3 message. The MS resolves this system information message to obtain the value of the T3212 timer.

IMIS attach location updating procedure

The IMSI attach location updating is a complement to the IMSI detach procedure. The

network uses the system information type 3 message to indicate whether the IMSI attach

and IMSI detach are allowed. If the network indicates that the IMSI attach and IMSI

detach are required, the MS triggers the IMSI attach procedure when the IMSI is

activated. When the MS activates the IMSI or the MS has moved from a non-coverage

area to a coverage area, the IMSI attach procedure is triggered if the IMSI attach is

allowed and the stored location area of the MS is the same as the location area of the serving cell.

Location updating ensures smooth communication by updating the information about the location of MSs stored in the VLR and HLR in real time.

Enhancement

None

Page 25: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 25 of 203

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.3.2 GBFD-110302 IMSI Detach

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

After the IMSI is detached, the subscriber is marked as an invalid subscriber by the network.

Then, the network does not send any paging message to this subscriber.

Benefits

IMSI detach is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services.

Description

IMSI attach and detach are IMSI-specific procedures. When an MS is powered off, it sends

the network the last message containing the detach request. On receiving this message, the

MSC/VLR sets the subscriber status to invalid. Then, the network does not page this

subscriber.

During the IMSI detach, the subscriber status is set only on the MSC/VLR but not on the

HLR. After the MS powers on again, the MS performs the IMSI attach procedure if the

current location area of the MS is the same as the location area registered before the MS is

powered off. Otherwise, the MS performs the normal location updating procedure to make the

location information stored in the HLR and VLR the same as the actual location area of the

MS.

The network informs the MS whether the IMSI attach or detach is allowed by sending the

system information type 3 message.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

Page 26: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 26 of 203

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.3.3 GBFD-110303 CS Paging

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

The network instructs the MS as the called party to access the network through the paging

procedure to complete the call establishment.

Benefits

Paging is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services. The paging

algorithm determines the paging efficiency of the GBSS.

The paging algorithm provides the following benefits:

The paging processing capability is one of the KPIs that indicate the system capability.

Huawei GBSS paging algorithm guarantees the paging processing capability while maintaining the paging efficiency and reducing the paging load.

The paging algorithm prevents the paging from being missed so that the subscriber can receive calls. Therefore, complaints decrease and customer satisfaction increases.

Description

Paging procedure: To answer the call timely, the MS in idle state listens to the paging channel

all the time. If there is a paging message to the MS, the MS responds to the paging and

completes the subsequent procedure as a called party.

The pagings are classified into PS pagings and CS pagings. When there is downlink data to be

transferred to the MS, the SGSN initiates the PS paging procedure. If a packet common

control channel (PCCCH) is configured, the PS paging message is transmitted on the PCCCH.

If PCCCH is not configured, the PS message is transmitted on PCH.

The CS paging message is sent on PCH. When a call arrives at the MSC that serves the MS,

the MSC determines the location area of the MS and then sends the paging message to all

BSCs in this location area. The BSCs determine the paging cell based on the location area and

determine the paging group that the MS belongs to based on the IMSI. Then, the BSC sends

the paging message to the corresponding BTS. The BTS then sends the paging message to the

MS on the assigned PCH.

Huawei GBSS supports the following three standard paging modes:

Page 27: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 27 of 203

Common paging mode

The paging message is transmitted on only the configured PCH and the IMSI defined

channel.

Complete paging mode

When an MS group is informed in this mode, the paging message of this group may be

transmitted on any PCH of the same timeslot. When dynamic change of PCH configuration occurs, paging message loss can be avoided in this mode.

Spaced paging mode

The BSS adds the paging message of a group to another paging channel to avoid

temporary overload. That is, the MS receiving common paging messages on channel N

can obtain the paging message on the next paging channel N+2.

Huawei GBSS supports paging message queuing, paging retransmission, simultaneous

processing of multiple pages, and paging flow control. This can effectively improve and ensure the paging capacity of the BSC.

Paging message queuing

The transmission of paging messages on the Um interface is limited on the basis of

paging groups. The paging message of one paging group can only be transmitted on the

paging block corresponding to the paging group. Therefore, the paging message queuing

is implemented on the BTS. That is, during the period when the BTS waits for

transmission, the paging messages from the BSC are buffered on the BTS. Upon the

transmission, the BTS selects the appropriate paging messages from the queue to

transmit on the corresponding block. If many paging messages have the same transmission priority, the BTS processes these messages according to the FIFO principle.

Paging retransmission

Generally, both the CN and BSS of the GSM network allow paging retransmission. A

two-level retransmission mechanism is provided. One retransmission is initiated by the

CN to handle long intermittence during the paging transmission. The retransmission

initiated by the CN takes a relatively long time. The other retransmission is implemented

on the BTS. The retransmission initiated by the BTS takes a relatively short time. Hence,

the two-level retransmission mechanism reduces the signaling load on the Abis interface

and A interface. Huawei BSS supports the paging retransmission. That is, when there is

no paging message or immediate assignment message to be transmitted on the

corresponding sending block, the paging messages that are already transmitted are

retransmitted on this sending block. The maximum number of paging retransmissions

can be specified by the system parameter.

Simultaneous processing of multiple paging messages

Each paging command from the BSC comprises only one paging message sent to one

MS, but each paging request on the Um interface may pack a maximum of four paging

messages sent to four different MSs. Therefore, to improve the efficiency of the paging

processing, the number of paging commands to the MS included in the paging message

on the Um interface should be as many as that is specified. In detail, a maximum of four paging messages can be included.

When the sending block of a paging group is polled, the BTS searches for the paging

messages to be transmitted in the paging queue corresponding to the paging group. Then,

based on the maximum combination principle, the BTS packs these paging messages or

several of the paging messages as appropriate type of paging request on the Um interface.

The paging request is then sent on the sending block to the MSs. In this way, the paging

commands of multiple MSs can be transmitted on the Um interface.

Paging flow control

Page 28: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 28 of 203

When the paging flow from the MSC exceeds the processing capability of the BSS, the

BSS initiates the selective flow control based on the current network situation to ensure

the robustness and proper operation of the system, the high efficiency of the paging capacity, and the smoothness and stability of services.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.3.4 GBFD-110304 Authentication

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Authentication is an identity verification procedure. With the authentication, only legal

subscribers can access the network.

Benefits

Authentication is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services. This

feature ensures that only the legal subscribers can access the network, thereby guaranteeing

the security of the network and services.

Description

Authentication is a procedure in which the GSM network verifies the validity of the identity

of an MS.

The purpose of authentication is to prevent unauthorized subscribers from accessing the

network and to protect the private information of authorized subscribers.

The network initiates the authentication procedure in the following situations:

The MS requests to change the information restored in VLR or HLR.

Service access such as MOC, MTC, MS activation or deactivation, or supplementary services is required.

Page 29: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 29 of 203

Initial network access is required after MSC/VLR reboot.

The ciphering key Kc sequence is mismatched.

The network needs to determine whether the MS is accessible to network.

Parameters for the MS to calculate new ciphering key is required.

The authentication procedure is always initiated and controlled by the network.

After the RR connection between the MSC and the BSS is established, the network can decide

whether to initiate the authentication procedure to verify the subscriber's identity. The BSS is

mainly responsible for the RR connection establishment and the transparent transmission

between the MSC and the MS. When the network determines to initiate the authentication

procedure, the MSC/VLR sends the MS an Authentication Request message to trigger the

authentication procedure. The MS responds to this request with an Authentication Response

message and reports the calculated result to the CN for approval for the authentication.

Authentication strengthens the network identification of subscribers and ensures their security.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.3.5 GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

This feature involves the following phases: MR reporting, MR processing, handover decision,

and handover execution. In the handover decision phase, an appropriate candidate cell is

selected for the handover.

Benefits

With this feature, the MSs in movement can continue with the ongoing call.

Handover is an important method to ensure the voice quality.

Page 30: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 30 of 203

Handover optimizes the overall performance of the system by adjusting the traffic volume of

the cells.

Description

The GSM service area is composed of a number of cells that provide continuous coverage.

The handover technique is introduced into the GSM system to enable the MSs in movement to

continue with the ongoing calls within the coverage area, optimizing the network

performance.

This feature involves the following phases: MR reporting, MR processing, handover decision,

and handover execution. The NEs involved in the handover include the MS, BSS, and MSC.

The measurement and MR reporting are implemented by the MS and BTS.

The MS measures the downlink level strength, downlink quality, and TA of the GSM cell and

then reports the information to the BTS. The BTS measures the receive level strength and

quality of the MS and then reports all the information to the BSC.

Generally, the MR processing is implemented by the BSC. The BSC performs the basic

functions such as filtering and interpolation to provide a reference for the subsequent

handover decisions. If the BTS performs the pre-processing of MRs, the MR processing can

be implemented by the BTS.

Based on different factors such as radio signal quality, radio signal level, speed, load, and

requirement of operators, the handover decision algorithm determines which candidate cell to

be used as the target cell for handover. After the target cell is selected, the handover procedure

is initiated. If the handover failure or rollback occurs, the MR indicating the result is reported

to the handover decision module. Then, the handover decision algorithm selects another

candidate cell as the target cell.

The handover decision algorithm is categorized into five types: high-speed railway fast

handover, emergency handover, enhanced dual-band network handover, load handover, and

normal handover.

The emergency handover is of five types: TA handover, bad quality handover, quick level

drop handover, interference handover, and no downlink measurement report handover. The

normal handover is of the following types: edge handover, hierarchical handover, PBGT

handover, concentric cell handover, AMR handover, and better 3G cell handover.

High-speed railway fast handover: This handover reduces the filtering time, speeds up the

handover and determines whether to trigger the handover based on the frequency offset and

signal level. In addition, the neighboring cell on a chain is selected to improve the reliability.

TA handover: The timing advance can be used as a standard to limit the cell coverage to

some extent. The BSC determines whether the TA value of the current MS exceeds the timing

advance limit (TALIM). If the TALIM is exceeded, the BSC initiates an emergency handover

with the cause value being great TA value. The TA value ranges from 0 to 63. The step of each

bit corresponds to the distance from the MS to the BTS, which is 553.5 m. The TA value 63

corresponds to a distance of 35 km. If the serving cell meets the conditions to trigger a TA

emergency handover, penalty is performed on the originating cell after a successful to prevent

a handover back to this cell due to other causes. The TA handover algorithm has been

optimized to meet the special requirements of the extended cells.

Quick level drop handover: This handover is responsive to the signals with rapid signal level

drop. The average value filtering and P/N decision methods are used in edge handover and

PBGT handover, and therefore the time for measurement and decision is prolonged. Therefore,

these handovers are not sensitive to rapid level drop in a short period. Therefore, concerning the rapid level drop, you can perform finite impact response (FIR) filtering on the original

Page 31: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 31 of 203

receive level. This filtering method is responsive to the rapid level drop based on the drop

slope of the original receive level.

When the quick level drop handover is triggered, the selected target cell should have the

highest priority based on the ranking in the preprocessing. If the candidate GSM cells do not

meet the handover conditions and there are neighboring 3G cells available, the inter-RAT

handover is performed if allowed. Otherwise, the algorithm determines to perform the

emergency handover of other types.

Edge handover: Edge handover is a type of rescue handover based on the signal level. To

trigger an edge handover, the receive level of the target cell should be at least one hysteresis

value (hysteresis of inter-cell handover) higher than the receive level of the serving cell.

When the receive level of the serving cell is lower than the edge handover threshold and the

P/N criterion is met within a period of measurement time, the edge handover is triggered for

the MS to maintain proper communication quality.

Bad quality handover: The transmission quality of the link is measured in bit error ratio

(BER). The BSC determines the quality of a radio link based on the quality level in the MR.

There are eight quality levels ranging from 0 to 7. Level 0 is the best and level 7 is the worst.

Bad quality level may be resulted from low signal power or channel interference. When the

receive quality of the serving cell is lower than the BQ handover threshold, the BSC starts the

handover algorithm for the MS to maintain proper communication quality. This procedure is

called BQ handover. If the serving cell meets the conditions to trigger the bad quality

handover, penalty is performed on the originating cell after a successful handover to prevent a

handover back to the cell due to other causes.

Interference handover: When the receive level of the serving cell is good, the network starts

the interference handover for the MS to maintain proper communication quality if the receive

quality deteriorates to a certain degree. If interference handover is triggered, the quality of the

channel in the serving cell is affected to some extent. Conversation, however, can be

maintained. At the same time, the receive level of the serving cell is relatively high and other

channel in the serving cell may be affected to some extent. Therefore, the intra-cell handover

is recommended.

PBGT handover: PBGT handover is also referred to as better cell handover. The PBGT

handover is based on the path loss. In PBGT handover, the system searches in real-time for a

cell with less path loss and in compliance with the system requirements. Then, the BSC

determines whether a handover is required. Compared with other handover algorithms, the

PBGT handover is triggered on the basis of path loss instead of receive level.

Hierarchical handover: The radio systems with the same coverage can be divided into four

layers. The highest layer, also the fourth layer, is the umbrella-shaped GSM900 cell with wide

coverage. This GSM900 cell implements the coverage and the connection of the fast-moving

MS. The third layer is composed of GSM900 macro cells. These are the most widely used

cells of the current system. Most of the MSs camp on this layer. The second layer is composed

of DCS1800 micro cells with smaller coverage. The DCS1800 cell is also the target cell for

capacity expansion aiming at solving the problem of insufficient frequency resources. The

bottom layer is composed of DCS1800 pico cells, which aims to meet the requirements of the

hot spot or the blind spot. The cell at the lower layer has a higher priority than the cell at the

higher layer.

Inter-layer handover: This handover is performed between different layers or between

different hierarchies at the same layer. The inter-layer handover is not performed between

cells at the same layer and the same hierarchy. If the following situations occur in a layered

and hierarchical network:

A cell with a higher priority exists.

Page 32: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 32 of 203

The cell meets the conditions to trigger the hierarchical handover. That is, the signal

level of a neighboring cell is higher than the sum of inter-layer handover threshold and hysteresis.

The P/N criterion is met. That is, within period P, the conditions to trigger the handover are met for period N.

Then, the call is handed over to the cell with a higher priority even if the serving cell can

provide good services. The purpose of hierarchical handover is to direct the traffic of the MS

to the cell with a higher priority so that the traffic can be distributed more properly.

During the call, the hierarchical handover flexibly adjusts the traffic distribution between

different layers to meet the requirements of various networking modes.

Enhancement

GBSS14.0

After being decoupled from Huawei handover II, handover between full-rate and half-rate

TCHs can be enabled when Huawei handover I is used. Handovers between full-rate and

half-rate TCHs include RQI-based handovers and capacity- and quality-based handovers. RQI

is short for radio quality indicator.

A handover penalty inheritance mechanism is provided for load handovers. A successful load

handover prevents ping pong handovers and ensures that the penalty cell list of the source cell

is inherited.

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.3.6 GBFD-110607 Direct Retry

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Directed retry is a special type of handover. That is, during the assignment procedure, the

BSC initiates the directed retry procedure to switch the MS to a neighboring cell if no TCH is

available or the traffic load is heavy in the serving cell.

Page 33: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 33 of 203

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature helps reduce the call access failure due to TCH congestion in the serving cell, and hence increases the access success rate.

This feature can balance the traffic load between different cells, and hence avoids the traffic load imbalance among cells.

Description

When the MS initiates a call, the BSC determines the assignment procedure that is to be used

according to the load of the current cell if the BSC receives an ASSIGN REQ message from

the MSC. There are three types of assignment procedures: normal assignment procedure,

mode modification procedure, and directed retry procedure. If the load of the cell is so high

that the cell does not admit a new service or that a newly admitted service will affect the

existing services, the BSC determines to perform a directed retry. The directed retry procedure

is as follows:

The BSC sends a CHAN ACTIV message to the target cell.

After receiving a CHAN ACTIV ACK message, the BSC requests circuit service resources.

After the requested resources are allocated successfully, the BSC sends an HO CMD to the

MS through the originating cell.

The MS sends an HO ACC message in the target cell to attempt to access the network. The

BTS sends an HO DETECT message to notify the BSC of the request and sends the PHY

INFO message to the MS.

The MS accesses the network through the FIRST SABM frame. Then, the BTS sends an EST

IND message and a UA frame to the MS for acknowledgment.

The MS sends an HO CMP message to the BSC through the target cell. Then, the BSC sends

an ASS CMP message to the MSC to process signaling in other assignment procedures. The

mobile originated procedure is complete.

Based on the homing BSC and MSC of the serving cell and target cell, the directed retry can

be classified into these types: intra-BSC directed retry, inter-BSC directed retry, and

inter-MSC directed retry. The directed retry helps reduce the call access failures due to TCH

congestion in the serving cell, increase the access success rate, and improve the network

quality.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

Page 34: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 34 of 203

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.3.7 GBFD-110608 SDCCH Handover

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

SDCCH handover refers to the handover from one SDCCH to another SDCCH in the

immediate assignment procedure.

Benefits

This feature helps improve the access success rate of MSs on the edge of the network.

Description

The SDCCH handover refers to the handover from one SDCCH to another SDCCH. This

feature helps improve the access success rate of MSs on the edge of the network, improving

the network quality.

The handover decision in SDCCH status is the same as that in TCH status. That is, the TA

handover, interference handover, BQ handover, signal level rapid fall handover, and edge

handover are allowed, and the load handover, PBGT handover, concentric handover, and

AMR handover are not allowed. In addition, the parameter used for handover decision in

SDCCH status is the same as that used for handover decision in TCH status.

Generally, the time for seizing the SDCCH is short, and therefore the SDCCH handover

seldom occurs. To prevent unnecessary handovers due to inaccurate MR in the initial phase of

call setup, the minimum time to start the SDCCH handover can be configured to control the

handover rate of the signaling channel.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

Page 35: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 35 of 203

None

1.3.8 GBFD-110401 Basic Cell Selection

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

When the MS is powered on or moves from a blind spot to a coverage area, the MS searches

for all frequencies that the PLMN allows and selects a proper cell to camp on. This procedure

is called cell selection.

Benefits

This feature facilitates the automatic selection of the network on the MS and avoids the

complexity of manual operations.

Description

The cell selection involves two scenarios:

The MS does not store any information about the BCCH TRX.

The MS sets a search frequency band first. When the MS is tuned to the frequency with

the highest level, it decides whether this frequency is the BCCH TRX. If it is the BCCH

TRX, the MS tries to decode the SCH to synchronize with this frequency and read the

BCCH system broadcast messages. The MS camps on this cell if the MS can decode the

BCCH data correctly and confirms that this cell belongs to the selected PLMN,

parameter C1 exceeds 0, and that the access to this cell is not denied. Otherwise, the MS

is tuned to the frequency with the second highest level and repeats the decoding and data verification procedures until the MS finds the available cell.

The MS stores the information about the BCCH frequency.

The MS searches for the stored BCCH frequency first. If the MS can decode the BCCH

data of the cell but cannot camp on this cell, it checks the BA (BCCH) list. If none of the

BCCH frequency in the list is suitable, the MS initiates the cell selection procedure

without the BCCH message mentioned earlier.

Whether an MS can select a cell to camp on is also influenced by the following factors:

Two parameters in system information 1

Cell bar access (CBA): It indicates whether a cell allows access of an MS. Cell bar

access is a one-bit code: Value 0 indicates that the access is allowed, and value 1

indicates that the access is not allowed. This parameter does not influence the access of

MSs that are handed over to the cell.

Access control (AC): It can be graded from level 0 to level 9 and from level 11 to level

15. Usually each GSM subscriber has an access level and each level is represented by

one bit: Value 1 indicates that the current cell does not allow the access of the MS with

the corresponding level value. Otherwise, the access is allowed. Subscribers with level

11 to level 15 have higher priority over subscribers with level 0 to level 9 in access, but there is no priority difference within level 11 to level 15 or within level 0 to level 9.

The minimum receive level allowed in system information 3:

Page 36: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 36 of 203

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN: It is the signal level threshold represented by a 6-bit code. The

range 0 to 63 corresponds to the level value range –110 dBm to –47 dBm.

Access parameter CBQ in system information 4

Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ): It is a one-bit code. CBQ and CBA together indicate the priority status of the cell. For details, see the following table.

CBQ CBA Priority Status of Cell Selection

Cell Reselection Status

0 0 Normal Normal

0 1 Barred Barred

1 0 Low Normal

1 1 Low Normal

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.3.9 GBFD-110402 Basic Cell Re-selection

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

The MS in idle mode reselects the cell based on the trigger condition to find a cell that can

provide better services. This procedure is called cell reselection.

Benefits

The MS is always bound to a relatively good cell to obtain better service quality.

Page 37: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 37 of 203

Description

The MS in idle mode periodically measures the receive level of the downlink BCCH TRX of

the serving cell and that of all downlink BCCH TRX in the BA list indicated by the BCCH

system information. Based on the corresponding algorithm, the MS then calculates the C2

value and determines whether to select a new serving cell. The MS periodically reselect cells

based on the cell reselection algorithm. In this way, the MS can find a cell that can provide

better service. This feature enables the MS to bind to a relatively good cell to obtain better

service quality.

The cell reselection of the MS is based on the BA list provided in the system broadcast

information about the serving cell. The GSM network has two BA lists. One is transmitted in

the system information on the BCCH, used for cell selection and reselection of MSs in idle

mode. The other is transmitted in the system information on the SACCH, used to inform the

MS about which BCCH TRX is used for handover monitoring in dedicated mode.

The MS triggers the cell reselection procedure in any one of the following scenarios (if the C2

algorithm is not activated, that is, C2 = C1):

The C2 value of a cell (belonging to the same location area as the current cell) exceeds

the C2 value of the current cell for five consecutive seconds.

The C1 value of a cell (belonging to a location area different from that of the current cell)

exceeds the sum of the C2 value of the current serving cell and cell selection hysteresis value for five consecutive seconds.

The current serving cell is barred.

The MS detects a downlink failure.

The C1 value of the serving cell is less than 0 for five consecutive seconds.

The access attempt fails after the number of retransmissions exceeds the maximum one during the random access of the MS.

The following parameter in system information 4 determines whether to activate the C2

calculation:

PI (Cell Reselect Parameters Indication) indicates whether the MS uses C2 as cell reselection

parameter and whether the parameters related to the C2 formula exist. It is a one-bit code: 0

indicates that the MS uses C1 as the cell reselection parameter; 1 indicates that the MS uses

C2 retrieved from the system information as the cell reselection parameter.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

Page 38: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 38 of 203

None

1.4 Connection Management

1.4.1 GBFD-110501 Call Control

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Through the call control procedure, the BSS provides required radio resources and terrestrial

circuit to the call so that the CN can complete the call connection procedure.

Benefits

Call control is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services.

Description

Huawei GBSS supports MOC, MTC, and emergency call. Through resource management

algorithms and control functions, the BSC provides the transmission channel for the call

control signaling between the MS and the MSC by establishing the RR connection. In the call

control, the BSS handles the call requests by priorities. For example, the emergency call takes

precedence over common calls, and therefore the BSS preferentially allocate the required

resources to the emergency call. For the BSC, the call control mainly involves the radio

channel allocation, A interface resource allocation with the coordination of MSC, and TCH

release. The following call procedures are supported:

MOC

MTC

Emergency call

MS-originated call release

Network-originated call release

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

Page 39: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 39 of 203

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.4.2 GBFD-110502 Assignment and Immediate Assignment

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Immediate assignment and assignment are two important procedures during the call setup.

Through the immediate assignment procedure, the MS can establish an RR connection with

the network. Through the assignment procedure, the network assigns TCHs to the MS. In this

way, a stable service connection is established between the network and the MS.

Benefits

Immediate assignment and assignment are basic features for the operators to provide the CS

speech services. Excellent immediate assignment and assignment algorithms ensure relatively

high KPIs, and therefore improves the radio network performance.

Description

Huawei GBSS supports the immediate assignment procedure, immediate assignment

combination, and corresponding assignment procedure specified in GSM specifications.

The purpose of the immediate assignment is to establish the RR connection between the MS

and the network.

Through the assignment procedure, the BSS assigns the TCH to the MS. The assignment is

classified into early assignment for MOC, late assignment for MOC, very early assignment

for MOC, early assignment for MTC, late assignment for MTC, and very early assignment for

MTC.

Immediate assignment

The immediate assignment procedure is initiated every time the MS responds to the

paging request or the MS initiates a service request. The purpose of the immediate

assignment is to establish the RR connection between the MS and the network. In the

immediate assignment procedure, the MS sends a CHANNEL REQUEST message on

the random access channel (RACH). The network then responds with an IMMEDIATE

ASSIGNMENT message to instruct the MS to access the network through the dedicated

channel. This channel can be a stand-alone dedicated control channel (SDCCH) or a

TCH. Huawei BSC supports cell-level SDCCH immediate assignment and TCH immediate assignment.

Immediate assignment combination

Each immediate assignment from the BSC on the Abis interface includes the response

for only one MS's channel request message. The response messages for channel request

on the Um interface, however, are of three types: immediate assignment, immediate

assignment extended and immediate assignment reject. One immediate assignment

extended may include the responses for two immediate assignment messages and one immediate assignment reject may include the immediate assignment commands (reject

Page 40: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 40 of 203

type) for a maximum of four MSs. To improve the processing efficiency on the Um

interface, the BTS encapsulates as many immediate assignment commands as possible

into one immediate assignment extended message or immediate assignment reject

message on the Um interface and sends it to the MS. This type of processing method is

called immediate assignment combination.

Early assignment for MOC

Early assignment for MOC is a procedure in which the MOC is assigned a TCH before

the call is established. After the immediate assignment is complete, the network sends

the assignment command to the MS, requesting the calling party to seize the TCH even if

the Altering message is not received. In this case, the ring tone is generated by the

network.

Late assignment for MOC

In terms of signaling, the network sends the assignment command to the MS only after

the Alerting message from the called party is received, requesting the calling party to

seize the TCH. In this case, the ring tone is generated by the MS because no TCH is

available before the connection is established.

Very early assignment for MOC

The very early assignment for MOC is a procedure in which the TCH instead of the

SDCCH is assigned to the calling party during the immediate assignment phase. This

function increases the service access speed. The system performs the authentication,

ciphering, other signaling exchanges, and subsequent call connection procedures on the

TCH. After receiving the ASS REQ message from the network, the BSS changes the TCH used for signaling exchanges to a real TCH by using the Mode Modify command.

Early assignment for MTC

Early assignment for MTC is a procedure in which the MTC is assigned a TCH before

the call is established. In terms of signaling, the MTC establishment is triggered when

the Paging Request message from the network is received. After the immediate

assignment is complete, the network sends the assignment command to the MS,

requesting the called party to seize the TCH even if the Altering message is not received.

In this case, the ring tone is generated by the network.

Late assignment for MTC

In terms of signaling, the network sends the assignment command to the MS only after

the Alerting message is received, requesting the called party to seize the TCH. In this

case, the ring tone is generated by the MS because no TCH is available before the

connection is established.

Very early assignment for MTC

The very early assignment for MTC is a procedure in which the TCH instead of the

SDCCH is assigned to the called party during the immediate assignment phase. This

function increases the service access speed. The system performs the authentication,

ciphering, other signaling exchanges, and subsequent call connection procedures on the

TCH. After receiving the ASS REQ message from the network, the BSS changes the TCH used for signaling exchanges to a real TCH by using the Mode Modify command.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

Page 41: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 41 of 203

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.4.3 GBFD-110503 Call Reestablishment

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

When the MS encounters a radio link failure during the call, the call reestablishment

procedure can be used to reestablish the radio link connection so that the original call can

proceed.

Benefits

The call is reestablished quickly after a call drop caused by the radio link failure. This

mechanism shortens the call intermission, and therefore improves the user experience.

Description

Call reestablishment is a procedure for connection recovery after the MS encounters a radio

link failure during the call. Call reestablishment may occur in a new cell or new location area.

The initiation of the call reestablishment attempt depends on the call status and whether the

cell allows call reestablishment.

After detecting a radio link failure, the BTS sends a radio link failure message to the BSC.

The BSC then releases the corresponding radio resource and waits for the MS to initiate the

call reestablishment.

After detecting a radio link failure, the MS sends a Channel Request message for call

reestablishment) in the selected cell (the original cell or a new cell) to the BSS. The BSS then

initiates and completes the immediate assignment procedure. After the immediate assignment

is complete, the MS sends a call reestablishment request to the MSC.

The MSC initiates the encryption and assignment procedures. The call establishment is almost

complete. The MSC sends a status query message to the MS to confirm whether the call status

or attach status matches the status information stored on the MSC. The MS sends the MSC a

status message to report the call status or attach status. The call reestablishment is complete.

During the call reestablishment, the MS cannot return to idle mode. Therefore, when the MS

selects a cell in a different location area as the target cell for call reestablishment, the location

updating procedure cannot be performed until this call terminates.

The MSC controls the call reestablishment procedure, and the BSC is responsible for the channel establishment and layer 3 message forwarding. Other processing is not required.

Page 42: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 42 of 203

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

MSC support is needed.

1.4.4 GBFD-112501 TCH Re-assignment

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

The TCH re-assignment refers to that the BSC re-assigns a TCH to the MS after a TCH

assignment fails.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

Minimizes the impact on the call continuity caused by the TRX channel fault, and

therefore ensures a successful first dialing.

Greatly reduces the assignment failures caused by the frequency interference in a cell,

and therefore minimizes the impact on the call continuity and improve the service quality.

Description

During a call, the BSC assigns a TCH to the MS after receiving an assignment request

message from the MSC. Then, the assignment command is issued to the MS through the Um

interface. If the TCH assignment fails because of various causes such as the co-channel

interference, the BSC re-assigns another TCH to the MS instead of sending an assignment

failure message to the MSC. If the TCH re-assignment is successful, the BSC sends a message

to the MSC, indicating that the assignment is complete; otherwise, the BSC sends a message

to the MSC, indicating that the assignment fails.

Enhancement

None

Page 43: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 43 of 203

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.4.5 GBFD-119202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

With this feature, the immediate assignment of packets and the uplink assignment of packets

are performed by the BTS instead of the BSC. The BSC pre-allocates the radio resources in

the uplink to the BTS so that the BTS completes the uplink TBF establishment and resource

scheduling in advance.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

Moving immediate assignment of packets to the BTS can increase the initial access rate

of the PS services and therefore improves end user experience.

Moving uplink assignment of packets to BTS can improve the performance of the TCP

application such as the FTP downloading by optimizing the rate of sending the TCP ACK message in the downlink, enhancing the user experience.

Description Moving immediate assignment of packets to BTS

Moving immediate assignment of packets to BTS is an optimization of the uplink immediate assignment.

Generally, after the MS sends the Packet Channel Request message, the BTS forwards

the message to the BSC to perform the immediate assignment.

To improve the access rate of the MS, the BSC can pre-allocate the uplink TBF resources

after the BTS is initialized and then sends the resource information to the BTS. When the

MS sends the Packet Channel Request message, the BTS uses the resource information

to immediately assign a channel and establish the uplink TBF for the MS. In this manner,

the MS can begin to send data blocks after receiving the immediate assignment message.

Meanwhile, the BTS notifies the BSC that the MS already accesses the specified channel

and the BSC should be responsible for the subsequent scheduling of the radio resources.

Page 44: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 44 of 203

Moving uplink assignment of packets to BTS

During the downlink transmission process, if there is data to be transmitted in the uplink,

the uplink channel request information is carried in the PACKET DOWNLINK

ACK/NACK message to request the uplink TBF establishment. Generally, the MS must

wait for the BTS to forward the channel request information to the BSC to implement the

channel assignment.

To improve the access rate of the MS, the BSC can pre-allocate the uplink TBF resources

after the BTS is initialized and then sends the resource information to the BTS. When

receiving the channel request of the MS, the BTS uses the resource information to

immediately assign a channel and establish the uplink TBF for the MS. In this manner,

the MS can begin to send data blocks after receiving the immediate assignment message.

Meanwhile, the BTS notifies the BSC that the MS already establishes the uplink TBF

and the BSC should be responsible for the subsequent scheduling of radio resources. As

a result, the time for the interaction between the BTS and the BSC is saved during the access of the MS.

This feature significantly reduces uplink access delay in TDM transmission mode.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU, a packet processing board, and a Gb interface board are required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.5 Radio Resource Management

1.5.1 GBFD-111001 TRX Management

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Page 45: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 45 of 203

Summary

TRX management involves four procedures about the TRX to support the signaling flow on

the control plane of layer 3.

Benefits

TRX management is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services. This

feature enables the management of the error reporting, flow control, and radio resources of the

TRX such as SACCH resources.

In Huawei GBSS, this feature can be implemented completely on the BSC side. Therefore, the

management operations on the BTS are avoided, O&M is simplified, O&M expenditure is

reduced, and thereby O&M efficiency is improved.

Description

To enable the Abis interface to support the signaling flow on the control plane of layer 3

specified by 3GPP TS 44.018/3GPP TS 24.008, a set of TRX-level service management

procedures are provided. This set of procedures is referred to as TRX management.

Procedures involved in the TRX management are all completed at the BTS or BSC without

being directed to the core network elements. The procedures are as follows:

SACCH filling information modification procedure

The BSC informs the BTS of the new system information used on all downlink SACCHs

so that the BTS can instruct the MS to initiate the system information updating

procedure.

Radio resource indication procedure

The BTS informs the BSC of the interference level on the idle dedicated channels of

each TRX. Therefore, the BSC is completely informed of the interference level of the current idle channels to facilitate subsequent channel assignments.

Flow control procedure

The frame unit controller (FUC) on a TRX informs the BSC of the TRX overload due to CCCH overload, AGCH overload, or TRX processor overload.

Error reporting procedure

The BTS informs the BSC of the detected downlink errors that cannot be reported by

other procedures.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

Page 46: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 46 of 203

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.5.2 GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Radio link management involves not only the establishment and release of radio links but also

the transfer of layer 3 messages.

Benefits

Radio link management is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services.

This feature involves the establishment and release of radio links, the transfer of layer 3

messages, and the real-time monitoring of radio links, and therefore facilitates the basic radio

link management.

Description

Radio link management, mainly used for the establishment and release of radio links and the

message forwarding, manages the data link layer. Through the procedures in the radio link

management, the BTS and the BSC can perform channel status management, initial service

establishment and service release. The procedures involved in the radio link management are

as follows:

Link establishment and release procedures

Link establishment indication: Through this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that

the multi-frame link has been established. The BSC establishes an SCCP link to the MSC according to this indication procedure.

Link establishment request: Through this procedure, the BSC requests to establish a multi-frame link on the radio path.

Link release indication: Through this procedure, The BTS informs the BSC that the radio

link release initiated by the MS is complete.

Link release request: Through this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to release a radio link.

Transparent transmission of layer 3 messages

Transmission of a transparent layer 3 message in acknowledged mode: Through this

procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to forward a transparent layer 3 message on the

Um interface in acknowledged mode.

Reception of a transparent layer 3 message in acknowledged mode: Through this

procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that a transparent layer 3 message on the Um interface is received in acknowledged mode.

Transmission of a transparent layer 3 message in unacknowledged mode: Through this

procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to forward a transparent layer 3 message in unacknowledged mode.

Page 47: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 47 of 203

Reception of a transparent layer 3 message in unacknowledged mode: Through this

procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that a transparent layer 3 message on the Um interface is received in unacknowledged mode.

Notification and handling of the link fault

Link error indication: Through this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC of the errors on the radio link layer.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.5.3 GBFD-111003 Radio Common Channel Management

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Radio common channel management involves the management of common control channels

such as PCH, RACH, AGCH, NCH, PPCH, PRACH, and PAGCH.

Benefits

Radio common channel management is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS

speech services.

Description Common control channels

Common control channels include PCH, RACH, AGCH, NCH, PPCH, PRACH, and

PAGCH.

Paging Channel (PCH): Downlink channel. The MS listens to the PCH at intervals to determine whether there is a call request from the MSC.

RACH: Uplink channel: The MS accesses the network through the RACH and requests the network to assign an SDCCH.

Page 48: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 48 of 203

Access Grant Channel (AGCH): Downlink channel. The network informs the MS of the

assigned dedicated channel (SDCCH or TCH) through the AGCH.

Notification Channel (NCH): Downlink channel, used for voice group call service (VGCS) and voice broadcast service (VBS).

Packet Paging Channel (PPCH): Downlink channel. The MS listens to the PPCH at intervals to determine whether there is a packet call to the MS from the SGSN.

Packet Random Access Channel (PRACH): Uplink channel. The MS requests for

network access through the PRACH.

Packet Access Grant Channel (PAGCH): Downlink channel. The network informs the MS of the assigned packet data service channel through the PAGCH.

Radio common channel management

The radio common channel management procedures involve the signaling procedures of

MS access and assignment, and also the resource management of the common channel. The involved procedures are as follows:

Channel request by MS: This procedure is triggered when the TRX detects a random

access request (channel request message) from the MS.

Paging: This procedure is used to page an MS on a paging sub-channel. It is used for the

MOC and initiated by the MSC through the BSC. The BSC determines the paging group

to be used according to the IMSI of the called MS. The values of this paging group are

sent to the BTS along with the identity information of the MS.

Immediate assignment: When the MS first accesses the BTS, the BSC assigns a dedicated channel for the MS immediately through this procedure.

CCCH load indication: The BTS informs the BSC of the load information on a CCCH

timeslot. If this load exceeds the load limit predefined in the system, the BTS sends the CCCH overload indication to the BSC periodically.

Delete indication: Through this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that one immediate

assignment message is deleted without being put in the AGCH queue due to AGCH overload. To do this, the BTS sends a Delete indication message to the BSC.

Broadcast information modification: The BSC informs the BTS of the new information

to broadcast on the BCCH. To do this, the BSC sends a BCCH information message to

the BTS.

Short message cell broadcast: Through this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to send the cell broadcast short message.

VGCS establishment notification: On receiving the VGCS ASSIG REQ message from

the CN, the BSC establishes a VGCS channel immediately or later based on the strategy

information in the VGCS ASSIG REQ message. Then, the BSC sends the Notification

information to the BTS. The BTS then sends this information to the MS. On receiving this information, the MS responds to the information accordingly.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

Page 49: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 49 of 203

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.5.4 GBFD-111004 Radio Dedicated Channel Management

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Radio dedicated channel management involves the assignment, activation, release,

management, and reporting of the dedicated channels such as SDCCH, SACCH, and TCH.

Benefits

Radio dedicated channel management is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS

speech services.

Description

Radio dedicated channel management involves the assignment, activation, release,

management, and reporting of the dedicated channels such as SDCCH, SACCH, and TCH.

The involved procedures are as follows:

Channel activation: Through this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to activate a dedicated

channel for an MS. After this channel is activated, the BSC assigns this channel to the MS

through the Immediate Assign, Assign Command, Additional Assign or Handover Command

message.

Channel mode modification: Through this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to change the

mode of an activated channel.

Handover detection: This procedure is used to detect the access of the switched MS between

the target BTS and the target BSC.

Start of encryption: This procedure is used to initiate the encryption procedure specified by

GSM TS 04.08.

Measurement reporting: This procedure consists of the mandatory basic measurement

reporting procedure and the optional measurement reporting procedure with pre-processing.

Through these two procedures, the BTS reports to the BSC all the parameters related to

handover decision.

SACCH deactivation: Through this procedure, the BSC deactivates the related SACCH of a

TRX according to the requirement of the channel release procedure specified by GSM TS

04.08.

Radio channel release: Through this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to release a radio

channel that is not in use.

Page 50: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 50 of 203

MS power control: Through this procedure, the BSS controls the transmit power of the MS

related to an activated channel. The MS power control decision should be implemented on the

BSC or BTS.

BTS transmit power control: Through this procedure, the BSS controls the transmit power of

the activated channel on the TRX. BSS transmit power control should be implemented on the

BSC or BTS.

Connection failure: Through this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that an activated

dedicated channel is disconnected.

SACCH information modification: Through this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to

change the filling information (system information) on an SACCH.

Talker detection: During a VGCS call, on receiving the Talker uplink access from the MS on

the idle uplink VGCS channel, the BTS constructs the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message on

the activated dedicated channel and reports to the BSC the detected Access delay received

from the MS.

Listener detection: When there is no listener in the cell, the dedicated radio downlink channel

allocated to the VGCS/VBS should be released timely to improve the resource utilization. The

BSC periodically broadcasts the Uplink free message in the cell. After all the listeners receive

this message, a Talker uplink access message is sent to the BTS on the idle uplink VGCS

channel. The BTS constructs the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message on the activated dedicated

channel and sends a listener detection message to the BSC. The BTS uses this message to

inform the BSC of the Access delay detected on the MS.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.5.5 GBFD-111005 Enhanced Channel Assignment Algorithm

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Page 51: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 51 of 203

Summary

Enhanced channel assignment algorithm is adopted to allocate the optimum channel based on

various factors.

Benefits

By taking into account of various factors, this feature enables the BSS to allocate the optimum

channel to each call, and hence ensures better voice quality for subscribers.

This feature enables the BSS to provide as many services as possible by using limited channel

resources, maximizing the service capacity of the network.

Description Channel assignment priorities:

Enhanced channel assignment algorithm is adopted for the selection of an optimum

channel. Each channel is assigned with a priority level. The channel of lower priority level is less likely to be allocated than the channel of higher priority level.

Enhanced channel assignment algorithm provides four types of priority levels: capacity,

quality, PS coordination, and management. The four types of priorities work together and

form the overall priority of each radio channel. A higher overall priority value indicates a

higher priority level and an earlier assignment of the radio resource accordingly. Four

factors are considered in determining the priority level: capacity, quality, PS coordination,

and management. The priority level has the following sub-priorities: frequency band,

data rate, concentric cell, AMR, interference, seizure record, number of PDCHs, and

TRX.

Channel assignment principles

Channel assignment based on interference: The channels with less interference should be

preferentially assigned except in the following situations: One situation is that for the

high priority calls or subscribers, the MSC should prevent the assignment of channels

whose interference exceeds a predefined interference threshold. Another situation is that

to improve the call completion rate and voice quality, the calls with better receive level

should be assigned relatively high-interference channels and those with worse receive

level should be assigned relatively low-interference channels, taken into account the

maximum transmit power of the MS and the path loss in a certain call environment.

Channel assignment based on channel configuration: Take into account factors such as

whether the channel and BCCH belong to the same TRX. Channel assignment based on

channel configuration helps reduce the network interference and hence improve the

network quality.

Channel assignment based on history record: This algorithm has the memory function.

The history record consists of the information on successful and failed channel seizures

and on the call drops during the seizures. In addition, the BSC needs to determine

whether a failed seizure and a call drop during a seizure are caused by radio channel

faults. Such history records provide reliable basis for the current channel assignment.

Channel assignment based on load balance: This mechanism facilitates the even

distribution of channel seizures on different TRXs. This not only reduces the co-channel

and adjacent-channel interference but also prevents the situation wherein a large number

of calls are carried on certain TRXs.

Channel assignment based on specific calls: Specific calls such as intra-cell handover

and concentric cell handover have special channel assignment strategies. The intra-cell

handovers are mainly triggered by factors related to channel quality. Therefore, the

frequency of the TRX that carries the original channel is likely to be interfered. If the

Page 52: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 52 of 203

original channel is in frequency hopping mode, certain frequencies in the frequency

hopping group are likely to be interfered to a great extent. Therefore, a channel of a

different TRX or a different frequency hopping group as the original channel should be allocated for the intra-cell handover.

Enhancement

GBSS8.1

Preferentially allocating channels on BCCH carrier for non-AMR speech services: Generally,

in a tight frequency reuse network, loose frequency reuse pattern, such as 4 x 3 mode, is

applied to the BCCH TRX; tight frequency reuse pattern, such as 1 x 3 mode, is applied to the

TCH TRX. The non-AMR speech (including FR, EFR, and HR) is more sensitive to

interference than the AMR speech. Therefore, if the network supports the AMR speech,

adhere to the following principles in channel assignment: For MSs that do not support AMR

speeches, preferentially allocate the channels on the carriers in loose frequency reuse pattern,

such as the BCCH carrier. For MSs that support the AMR speech, allocate the channels on the

carriers in tight frequency reuse pattern to improve the overall voice quality in the network.

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.6 Operation and Maintenance

1.6.1 MRFD-210301 Configuration Management

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary

This feature provides operators with the method for collecting and managing the information

about NEs (MBSC and MBTS). It can control the links between the NEs. The graphic user

interface (GUI) makes it easy for configuration management.

Page 53: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 53 of 203

Benefits

This feature provides a descriptive overview of the current status of the network and supports

fast installation, capacity expansion, and data configuration of the network.

Description

This feature provides operators with the method for collecting and managing the information

about NEs (MBSC and MBTS). It can control the links between the NEs. The graphic user

interface (GUI) makes it easy for configuration management.

The NE configuration can be classified into five levels:

1. Initial configuration

Design the initial configuration of the MBSC and MBTS.

2. Basic site configuration

Configuration of the O&M communication between the MBSC, MBTS, and the M2000

3. External site hardware configuration on the MBTS side

Configuration of TMA data and antennas

4. MBTS configuration and site-specific configuration on the MBTS side

Data configuration of the A/Iu interface, Abis/Iub interface, Iur-g/Iur interface, and the

transport network

5. Cell/TRX configuration on the MBSC side

Data configuration of cells, channels, and neighboring cells

Configuration from level 1 to level 3 can be implemented either with the GUI of the

configuration tool or with the pre-defined configuration files on the LMT. Configuration of

level 4 and level 5 can be implemented either through the M2000 or through the configuration

tool.

Online/Offline data configuration and status query

The configuration data is not sent to the host until it takes effect. This improves the

efficiency of configuring a large quantity of data. The MBSC supports offline

configuration based on host subracks. Therefore, the services are not interrupted during capacity expansion.

During the switchover of the IP interface board and the ATM/TDM interface board,

offline configuration supports the modification of the interface board type and the switchover of the active/standby boards.

Online data configuration enables the data to be sent to the host immediately after the

configuration. There is no need to reset the system or reload the data.

X.731 defines the object status. The operators can query the object status such as the board status or cell status and the time of the latest status change.

Configuration right control

With the configuration right control, data can be configured only on the LMT of the

MBSC/MBTS or the M2000 client. In addition, the operators always have the

configuration right. This improves the reliability of the system.

Configuration rollback on the MBSC side

Page 54: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 54 of 203

When the equipment or network malfunctions due to improper data modification,

operators can perform the rollback operation to restore the system in a short time.

MBSC data backup

Two OMUs work in active/standby mode. The system synchronizes the data on the standby OMU with that on the active OMU.

The MBSC supports automatic backup and manual backup. It provides a data backup and restoration tool.

Setting of network parameters

The radio network parameters are of two types: MBSC-oriented parameters and

cell-oriented parameters, which are used in different radio conditions. The MBSC can

check the integrity and consistency of configuration data such as the data of a cell.

Detection of missing neighboring cell

Based on the measurement information from the user equipment (UE), the neighboring

cells missed for configuration can be detected and reported. This helps the operators

optimize the configuration of neighboring cells and therefore improves the network

planning efficiency.

Enhancement

RAN5.1 supports the modification of the interface board type and active/standby state of

boards in offline mode.

RAN5.1 supports the query of the time when the latest status changes.

RAN10.0 supports the reporting of MBTS status to the M2000.

GBSS9.0&RAN11.1

Web LMT: The operation and maintenance GUI of the MBSC uses the Web LMT based on

the browser/server mode. The configuration GUI uses the CME. The MML client is

incorporated in the Web LMT and therefore the configuration and maintenance for the MBSC

can be carried out through the MML commands. After the Web LMT is used, there is no need

to install the LMT software on the local PC. The configuration and maintenance for the

MBSC can be carried out through the Web browser. In addition, the upgrade of the software

on the local PC is not required when the MBSC software is upgraded, and therefore the

operation efficiency is significantly improved.

GBSS12.0

Cell Frequency Band Modification in One Key: The frequency band of a cell can be

changed through MML commands or CME reconfiguration. The new frequency band or

bands must contain the earlier frequency band of the cell. For example, change a GSM900

cell to a GSM900/DCS1800 cell. This feature applies only to the frequency band adjustment

scenario where a single-band network is changed to a dual-band network.

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

Page 55: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 55 of 203

None

Dependency on other NEs

Configuration management is implemented through the M2000 or the LMT.

1.6.2 MRFD-210302 Performance Management

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary

This feature periodically takes samples of counters about the management objects, bearer

resources, and services. The sampled data is then collected, saved, monitored, and analyzed.

In this way, the operating status of the network can be obtained. Therefore, this feature helps

operators quickly locate and solve problems and optimize the network.

Benefits

This feature provides an efficient method for monitoring the network performance and

facilitates the network troubleshooting and optimization. The real-time performance

monitoring is a more effective feature.

Description

Performance management helps collect the measurable performance data to obtain the

network operating status, helping the operators quickly locate and solve problems and

optimize the network.

Performance measurement management

This feature provides operators with a method for managing the measurable performance data.

For the new commissioning NEs (MBSC and MBTS), the pre-defined performance statistics

completely starts after the initial start-up or restart. The performance statistics can be

suspended or restored manually.

The MBSC and MBTS provide the interfaces between them and the M2000, allowing the

M2000 to collect necessary statistic data and to configure the related parameters including

statistic counters and periods.

The statistic data is saved on the M2000 in binary-formatting files in every statistic period.

The result files are saved on the MBTS for up to 24 hours or on the MBSC for up to 10 days.

If a fault occurs in data transmission, you can obtain the lost data through the M2000.

Performance measurement counter

The performance measurement counters include key counters and other counters. The key

counters are used to generate the KPIs of the network which are defined on the M2000, and

these pre-defined counters are initialized immediately after the MBSC and the MBTS start.

The KPIs, related original counters, and formula can be added, modified, and deleted on the

M2000. Other counters indicating the network performance can also be added as required.

In the UMTS network, the following measurement objects are supported:

Cell measurement

Page 56: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 56 of 203

Neighboring cell measurement

Inter-RAT neighboring cell measurement

RNC overall measurement

ATM transport measurement

IP transport measurement

Standard interface measurement

NE hardware measurement

Real-time performance monitoring

This feature supports the real-time performance monitoring and displays the details of the

monitoring result in the GUI. Therefore, it facilitates the troubleshooting, drive test, network

optimization, and other operations.

The monitoring tasks are managed by the M2000 client. The data monitored is displayed in

curve and stored in a file automatically for later review.

The following items can be monitored in real time:

Equipment performance: CPU usage, clock source quality, and so on.

Connection performance: SIR measurement, UE transmit power, and so on.

Cell performance: PCPICH transmit power, number of UEs in the cell, and so on.

Link performance: IMA group, UNI link, and so on.

Service performance: RF performance, UL channel scanning, and resource usage.

In the GSM network, the following performance counters are supported:

The measurements can be classified into the following types according to the measurement

object:

BSC measurement

Cell measurement

TRX measurement

Neighboring cell measurement

The measurements can be classified into the following types according to the MS status:

Paging

Call

Measurement report

Channel allocation

Enhanced performance measurement:

Measurement of incoming and outgoing cell handovers

This measurement provides data about the incoming and outgoing cell handovers. The

collected measurement data assists the operators in network adjustment and optimization.

Undefined adjacent cell measurement

This measurement provides BSIC, BCCH frequency, average signal strength, number of

MRs of adjacent cells that are included in the BA list but not included in the adjacent cell

relationship table. The collected measurement data assists the operators in network adjustment and optimization.

Page 57: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 57 of 203

Defined adjacent cell measurement

This measurement provides BSIC, BCCH frequency, average signal strength, number of

MRs of the defined adjacent cell. The collected measurement data assists the operators in network adjustment and optimization.

Uplink and downlink balance measurement

This measurement provides the data about the balance between the uplink and downlink

of TCHs. The uplink and downlink balance level is graded according to the receive

levels in the uplink and downlink. The collected measurement data assists the operators in network adjustment and optimization.

Call drop measurement

This measurement provides the average level and quality in the uplink and downlink, and

also the average TA value of SDCCH call drops and TCH call drops. The collected measurement data assists the operators in network adjustment and optimization.

BTS out-of-service measurement

This measurement is provided by the performance management of the BSC together with

the M2000. This measurement provides the start time of BTS out-of-service, end time of BTS out-of-service (or service recovery time), and the duration of BTS out-of-service.

Enhancement

UMTS

RAN5.1 supports HSDPA-related counters and monitoring items.

RAN6.0 supports HSUPA-related counters and monitoring items.

RAN10.0 supports the real-time performance monitoring on the IP patch.

GBSS

GBSS8.0 supports the real-time performance monitoring and the counter measurement related

to the built-in PCU.

GBSS8.1 supports real-time traffic measurement, enhanced IP performance measurement, and

measurement period of 24 hours. In addition, it supports the measurement of traffic statistics

of group call and group broadcast on the BSC level and cell level.

GBSS12.0

Report Speed Improvement of M2000 Northbound Interface: The speed of reporting

traffic statistics over the northbound interface of the M2000 is improved by moving the

calculation functionality of KPIs from the M2000 to the BSC. The BSC calculates the KPIs

based on the measured counters, and then sends the calculation result to the M2000. After

synchronizing its measurement period with the measurement period of the BSC, the M2000

obtains the calculation result of the BSC. In this way, the M2000 can generate the northbound

interface KPIs in a short period of time. In ideal conditions, the M2000 can generate the

northbound interface KPIs in 10 to 15 minutes after synchronizing its measurement period

with the measurement period of the BSC. The period of time required depends on the capacity

of the BSC.

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Page 58: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 58 of 203

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

Performance management and the real-time performance monitoring are implemented by the

M2000.

1.6.3 MRFD-210303 Inventory Management

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0 and RAN5.1.

Summary

This feature assists in reporting the information about the physical and logical objects of the

NEs to the M2000, and also assists in managing this information on the M2000.

Benefits

As a large number of devices are deployed on networks, it becomes difficult to manage

equipment. For ease of equipment management, operators need to obtain the information

about the physical device and some important logical information. With this feature, the

information can be reported to the M2000, facilitating the asset management. In addition,

operators can obtain the accurate decision-making data of the existing networks in time.

Description

The inventory management helps operators to manage the network assets and configuration

data. With this function, network assets and configuration data can be managed on the M2000.

The objects that are managed by this function include physical objects (such as rack, frame,

slot, board, and fan) and logic objects (such as cell, software, and patch).

Upon a request from the M2000, the information about the network assets and configuration

data are generated in an .xml file and then are sent to the M2000. The M2000 saves the

uploaded information in the network inventory database.

Upon a request from the M2000, the MBSC reports its information about the assets and

configuration to the M2000. In terms of the method of collecting and reporting the

information about the base station, the UMTS network is different from the GSM network.

In the UMTS network, the NodeB works as an independent NE and supports the reporting of

its inventory information to the M2000.

In the GSM network, the inventory of the BTS is jointly controlled by the BSC and the BTS.

The BTS inventory management system is deployed on the M2000. The M2000 sends the

required inventory information command to the BSC through the southbound interface. On

reception of this command, the BSC queries the inventory information about all the BTSs,

generates files, and sends the files to the M2000. Then, the M2000 interprets the files and saves them in the database. Some inventory information can be imported through the manual

Page 59: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 59 of 203

input or other files. The M2000 supports the query, synchronization, modification, export, and

import of the BTS inventory information.

The BTS supports the reporting of the information about the electronic label, software version,

and hardware version of the BTS boards as well as the information about the manufacturer of

the heat exchanger. In addition, the BTS also supports the input and reporting of the bar code

of the BTS cabinet.

As the ID of a board, the electronic label provides the basis for board replacement, presents a

traceable mark in the entire lifecycle of the board, and supplies the data required for the

management, tracing, and maintenance of the board. The information about the electronic

label of the BTS board includes: the board model, bar code, BOM code, description,

production date, name of the manufacturer, and release number.

The M2000 provides the import or modification function for the inventory information that is

not supported by the BTS. That is, the information can be manually entered. The information

includes the information about the BTS antenna, electronic label of the board that fails to

report the electronic label (mainly purchased parts), and the ultimate service time of the board

information area. This information is not sent to the BTS for storage but is saved only in the

inventory management system on the M2000.

In addition, no storage part is available in the BTS cabinet, and therefore the bar code of the

cabinet needs to be manually entered on the M2000 or the LMT. The BTS supports the input

of this information and also the storage of it in the main control board of the BTS. Then, the

BTS sends the information to the BSC through the inventory management interface.

Enhancement

UMTS

None

GSM

Board electronic label Board software version and hardware version Information about the manufacturer of the heat exchanger Cabinet electronic bar code

Obtain BTS inventory information and generate the BTS inventory file and generate the BTS inventory file

Inventory management system: Obtain the inventory file, interpret inventory information, and support the GUI display, modification, export, and import of the BTS inventory information.

M2000

BSC

BTS

Query Return results

Synchronization Uploading files

Page 60: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 60 of 203

GBSS8.0 supports the reporting of the electronic label of the BTS board according to

electronic label standards 3.0.

GBSS8.1 adds the reporting of the information about the software and hardware versions of

the BTS boards, manufacturer of the heat exchanger, electronic labels of the BBU backplane,

fan board, and power monitoring board, and the input and query of the electronic bar code of

the cabinet.

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

Inventory information can be queried only on the M2000. Therefore, the M2000 should

support the inventory management feature.

1.6.4 MRFD-210304 Faulty Management

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary

This feature involves various fault management functions such as system auto test, fault

detection, fault monitoring, and fault rectification of the UTRAN. This enables the operators

to learn about the network fault timely and take proper measures to avoid service interruption.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

Enables the automatic monitoring of the network equipment.

Enables the operators to learn about the actual state of the network timely and comprehensively by querying the active alarm list and alarm log.

Facilitates the manual board test, with which the operators can identify the faulty board

timely.

Description

The fault management involves system auto test, fault detection, fault monitoring, and fault

rectification. This enables the operators to learn about the network fault timely and take

proper measures to avoid service interruption.

Page 61: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 61 of 203

The automatic hardware test of the system is performed during the startup of the MBSC or

MBTS. When the MBSC or MBTS is in operation, the system status monitoring can also be

started manually if required.

Fault detection

This involves the fault detection of the physical layer, transmission link layer, and others.

The fault detection can be started manually. Operators can either browse the monitoring result online or save the monitoring result as files.

Alarm management

Operators can browse the real-time alarm information, query the historical alarm

information, and save the alarm information as required. The online help provides

detailed methods for clearing alarms.

Alarm correlation processing

Based on certain built-in mechanism, the alarm correlation handling mechanism enables

the system to keep the most important alarms instead of all the related alarms when a

fault occurs. The number of alarms can be greatly reduced in this way and network

problems can be easily identified and handled. This mechanism is pre-defined and

incorporated in the NEs such as MBSC and MBTS. More alarm correlation processing mechanisms can be defined by the operators on the M2000.

The operators may also filter the alarms of an object. The alarms of this object, if filtered, are

not reported.

The alarms of the access network include MBSC alarm and MBTS alarm.

MBSC alarm

The MBSC alarm system provides two types of alarm output devices: alarm console and

alarm box. The alarm box provides visual and audible alarms. The alarm console is a part of

the OMC. It provides detailed alarm information, recovery suggestion, and alarm box control.

The MBSC alarm system is composed of the BAM alarm module, centralized network

management alarm database, alarm console, and alarm box. Alarm system accurately provides

the fault information detected by the MBSC system to the maintenance personnel through

alarm information. The maintenance personnel can then rectify the fault accordingly.

Alarm severity

According to the severity and influence of the alarms, there are four alarm severities: critical,

major, minor, and warning. Different severity of alarms is presented in different manner, such

as color and sound.

Alarm classification

According to its subsystem and subsystem type, alarms can be classified into fault alarm and

event alarm. Clearance alarms are provided for fault alarms. Event alarm has no

corresponding clearance alarm.

According to the cause of alarms, alarms can be classified into inter-module communication

alarm, signaling subsystem alarm, clock subsystem alarm, and power supply subsystem alarm.

These alarms help the maintenance engineers quickly locate the faults. This feature also

provides alarm about software running, such as CPU overload alarm and GBAM hard disk

capacity alarm.

Alarm location and recovery suggestions

Page 62: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 62 of 203

The alarm console provides detailed alarm information, including the ID of the board for

which the alarm is generated, the potential cause and possible consequence of the alarm, and

the recovery suggestion.

Alarm box control

The alarm box control provides manual control of the alarm box. You can mute the alarm

sound or turn off the LED for the alarm box manually by related MML command. The alarms

can be printed in real time. The alarm parameters data can be configured and modified. Based

on the configuration, the MBSC can automatically control where the alarms will be sent, such

as to alarm box or to OMC alarm console. This enables flexible alarm control.

Alarm query

The alarms can be queried in various conditions. You can browse the fault alarm, emergency

event alarm, or other event alarms in real time on the alarm console. You can also query the

history fault alarm, clear alarm, and event alarm according to alarm serial number, alarm ID,

date and time of alarm, alarm module number, function number, or alarm severity. The

queried historical alarms can be saved.

Environment monitoring unit

Each subrack of the BSC6900 can connect to an environment monitoring unit (EMU) through

the serial ports. The EMU has four types of ports: fixed analog ports (four) used for receiving

–48 V voltage, –24 V voltage, temperature, and humidity alarms; extended external analog

ports (four); fixed external Boolean ports (four) used for receiving water, smoke, infrared, and

door status alarms; and extended external Boolean ports (32).

Alarm information is stored on the M2000. MBSC has buffer capability. A maximum of 150

thousand historical alarm records can be stored.

MBTS alarm

MBTS alarms can be queried according to the site number, cell number, or TRX number

(applicable to BTS) to confirm the failure and clearance states.

MBTS alarms can be queried and displayed on both the alarm console at the remote end and

the Site Maintenance System at the local end.

The MBTS alarm supports the input interface of the environment alarm. The environment

alarms supported by the MBTS are fire, smoke, temperature, humidity, door control, and main

supply alarms. The ranges of alarms can be controlled by alarm threshold setting on the

MBSC. The MBTS also supports the function of clearing environment alarms to provide

flexible clearance of the alarms.

Enhancement

UMTS

RAN5.1 supports the handling of HSDPA related alarms.

RAN6.0 supports the handling of HSUPA related alarms.

RAN6.0 supports the E1/T1 BER measurement.

RAN10.0 supports the fault diagnosis of the IP path.

RAN10.0 supports the reporting of the status of the MSC resource pool.

In RAN11.0, the RNC supports the alarms of external AC power.

Page 63: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 63 of 203

GSM

The GBSS8.0 supports the clearance of PS-related alarms, including device alarms and

service alarms.

The GBSS8.1 supports suppression of the intermittent and repeated alarms, alarm correlation

processing, and enhanced alarm positioning information.

The GBSS12.0 support Alarm Restraint:

Alarm Restraint: With this function, alarms operators can monitor the network and timely

detect a fault. The number of alarms and the proper generation of alarms directly affect the

efficiency in fault rectification. To prevent the generation of a great number of alarms, the

generation of repeated alarms, and the generation of multiple alarms caused by one fault, the

alarms are suppressed on the basis of temporal correlation and spatial correlation.

To suppress alarms based on temporal correlation, the BSC compares each generated alarm

with the related alarms generated before and after the alarm. Based on the comparison result,

the BSC determines whether to report the alarm.

To suppress alarms based on spatial correlation, the BSC correlates the alarms that must be

reported. In this way, the information about multiple alarms is displayed in one alarm.

The purpose of the preceding two measures is to integrate multiple alarms into one alarm. In

this way, the number of alarms is reduced, whereas the usability of the alarm is increased. The

system does not discard the suppressed alarms, and users can query these alarms.

GBSS14.0

OML Identification: The BSC identifies a BTS over the Abis interface based on the timeslot

for the port where the OML of the BTS is configured. If transmission connections to two

BTSs with the same configurations, including the site type, boards, cells, and TRXs, are

reversed, the data configurations that the BSC sends to the two BTSs are also reversed.

However, no alarm is reported because these two BTSs and their cells work properly. In this

case, maintenance personnel cannot quickly identify the incorrect transmission connections.

In practice, the reversed radio parameters for cells under these BTSs cause a decrease in the

network KPIs and problems such as co-channel interference, adjacent-channel interference,

and handover failures.

The OML identification function allows the BSC to check the electronic label of a BTS after

the OML to the BTS is set up. If the BSC detects that the electronic label is inconsistent with

the configured one, the BSC does not allow the BTS to work and reports an alarm so that

maintenance personnel can quickly identify the incorrect transmission connections.

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

The fault management is implemented through the M2000 or the MBSC/MBTS LMT.

Page 64: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 64 of 203

1.6.5 MRFD-210305 Security Management

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary

This feature enhances the network security management by providing various user

authorization and management mechanisms.

Benefits

This feature provides user authorization and management mechanism, enhancing the network

security management.

Description

Security management enhances the system security in terms of the following aspects:

Facilitates user management such as the management of user accounts, user rights, and

user command groups.

Supports the backup and restore of the system data.

Adopts the Windows security policies for the IP services of the BAM to protect the system from network attacks.

Supports the installation of Windows antivirus software such as Officescan.

Collects the database operation logs and auditing logs.

Reports corresponding alarms when network attacks are detected or the number of unauthorized accesses exceeds the threshold.

Supports FTP over the Security Socket Layer (SSL).

Supports SSL for the communication between the OMC and the GBSS/RAN. This

enables the encryption of all transmitted data.

Adds authority control for the binary interface between the GBSS/RAN and the OMC.

Records the information about the operation logs for the binary interface between the

GBSS/RAN and the OMC.

Enhancement

UMTS

RAN6.0 supports the SSL encryption of the FTP transmission.

RAN10.0 supports the SSL encryption of the data transmitted between the GBSS/RAN and

the OMC.

RAN11.0 supports the authority control and log recording for the binary interface between the

GBSS/RAN and the OMC.

GSM

None

Page 65: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 65 of 203

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

The M2000 must support this feature.

1.6.6 MRFD-210309 DBS Topology Maintenance

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0 in the GSM and RAN 5.0 in the UMTS.

Summary

The LMT provides the topology maintenance for the distributed base station, and therefore

facilitates the maintenance operations.

Benefits

This feature provides convenient O&M functions for the distributed base station, reducing the

O&M expenditure of the operators.

Description

The distributed base station supports the automatic scan of the RRU topology. The LMT

provides the topology maintenance for the distributed base station. The functions that

supported by this feature are as follows:

The networking structure of the distributed base station is displayed in a visualized way.

Different colors are used to mark the status of each BBU, RRU, and CRPI link.

The BBU or RRU can be selected directly from the displayed topology for maintenance.

Page 66: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 66 of 203

Figure 1-1 UMTS NodeB topology

Figure 1-2 GSM BTS topology

Enhancement

The RAN6.0 supports the automatic scan of the RRU topology.

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Page 67: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 67 of 203

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.6.7 MRFD-210310 BTS/NodeB Software USB Download

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS9.0 and RAN10.0.

Summary

With this feature, the user or the maintenance personnel can download and activate the MBTS

software through the USB without using the laptop. Therefore, the MBTS can be set up easily

and quickly.

Benefits

With this feature, the software upgrade is independent of Abis/Iub transmission. Therefore,

the upgrade is shortened and the MBTS can be set up quickly with a low cost. In addition, the

maintenance personnel do not need to enter the site again because they can perform the

software commissioning remotely.

Description

The 3900 series MBTSs provide the USB port to download and activate the host software.

After the MBTS hardware is installed, the system automatically upgrades the software when

the USB disk is inserted.

This feature enables the software upgrade to be performed through the USB without using a

laptop. With this feature, the software upgrade is independent of Abis/Iub transmission.

Therefore, the upgrade is shortened and the MBTS can be set up quickly with a low cost.

After the software is activated and the system begins to operate, the hardware fault can be

detected according to the indicator on the BBU panel so that the fault is rectified in the

shortest time. In addition, the maintenance personnel do not need to enter the site again

because they can perform the software commissioning remotely.

This feature supports encryption and validity verification for configuration files in the USB

disk. With this feature, users can encrypt configuration files in the USB disk using the USB

disk encryption tool provided by the M2000, ensuring data security. The MBTS can parse

encrypted configuration files and verify the validity of these files. However, this feature does

not support encryption and parsing for software packages, but the MBTS can verify the

validity of data in these software packages.

Enhancement

GBSS14.0

All configuration files in the USB disk are encrypted using the USB disk encryption tool

provided by the M2000. The files must be decrypted before being copied from the USB disk

by a board.

Page 68: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 68 of 203

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.6.8 GBFD-111202 O&M of BTS

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Through the BTS OMC at the local end or the remote end, O&M can be performed for BTS

logical objects or BTS boards. The logical objects include site, cell, baseband (BT), channel

(CH), radio carrier (RC), and timeslot.

Benefits

The BTS O&M has powerful functions, facilitates and simplifies the O&M, and reduces the

O&M expenditure.

Huawei GBSS BTS O&M system provides the following benefits:

Flexible operations enable the operators to perform the O&M at either the local end or remote end as required by the engineering or O&M.

Compared with O&M at separated sites, the O&M system provided by Huawei GBSS

reduces the manual operations and the O&M cost because Huawei GBSS supports the centralized O&M for BTSs controlled by one BSC.

The remote O&M system helps promptly locate and solve the problem of BTS operation, and hence reduces the operating expenditure.

Description

The BTS O&M involves the following operations: query, loading, and activation of software

version; query of site attributes; query of the usage of various resources; transmission

performance test; reset in levels; environment monitoring; alarm masking; query of ring

networking parameters.

O&M of multiple BTSs

This function reduces the work of maintenance personnel and also the possibility of improper

operations, particularly in the case of large-scale operation. Huawei GBSS supports the four

Page 69: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 69 of 203

types of operations for multiple BTSs: query of fault, query of software version, forced

loading of software, and software activation.

O&M of cell

O&M of cell involves the following operations: cell attribute query, cell administrative state

change, cell system information sending, and forced cell handover. The forced cell handover

provided by the BSC refers to the forced handover with or without an assigned target cell. The

BSC selects a target cell based on the MR to ensure that the handover is successful. The

forced cell handover is used to switch the subscribers in a cell to another cell before the BTS

maintenance to ensure that no call drops occur during the BTS maintenance.

O&M of BT

O&M of BT involves the following operations: query of BT attribute, reset in levels for BT,

query and change of BT administrative state, and BT test.

O&M of CH

O&M of CH involves the following operations: query of CH attribute, query and change of

CH administrative state, forced CH handover, and related O&M of CH.

O&M of RC

O&M of RC involves the following operations: O&M of TRX administrative state, query of

TRX attributes, and automatic frequency calibration.

O&M of BTS involves also board-specific operations such as query, maintenance, and reset of

the BTS boards. You can select specific boards on the O&M system to query information such

as the software and hardware information, extended power information. In addition, you can

reset boards and query board alarms on the O&M system. For certain boards, you can also set

the clock. By checking the operating status displayed on the LMT, you can be fully aware of

the state of the BTS.

All O&M functions can be implemented at either the remote end or local end, facilitating the

use and query. The general maintenance or operation of the logical object can be performed at

the remote end. In the case of hardware replacement, all O&M can be performed at the local

end.

Enhancement

GBSS8.1

Flexible OML configuration:

In the case of fixed OML configuration, the OML must be configured on timeslot 31 of E1 or

timeslot 24 of T1. Any timeslot other than timeslot 31 on the E1 of the upper-layer BTS is

allocated to the OML of the lower-level BTSs. This type of configuration meets the

requirement in most cases but not in the case of swapping. The OML cannot be configured for

the BTS in the case of swapping where the OML of the new BTS should be configured on the

same timeslot as the existing transmission devices.

This problem can be solved by the flexible OML configuration. Before putting the BTS into

operation, configure the data on the BSC side to reserve the E1 timeslots to be used by other

transmission devices. During the configuration of OML for the BTS, the OMLs of the BTS

and its lower-level BTSs are configured on the timeslots other than those reserved ones. In

this way, the normal operation of the BTS and other transmission devices is ensured.

GBSS13.0

Page 70: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 70 of 203

IP transmission of the monitoring device: The BTS may be connected to external

monitoring device from customers. The monitoring device supports IP transmission. In this

version, vacant FE electrical port or electrical port of the BTS is connected to the IP port of

the monitoring device, providing data routing and forwarding functions for the monitoring

device. The monitoring data is reported to the PC or other maintenance terminals through the

transmission network for analysis of the monitoring information. The BTS only provides the

routing and forwarding functions and does not support the analysis of monitoring information

of customers.

Only the BTS3900/A/L/DBS3900 (GTMUb) and BTS3012 series BTSs support this function.

GBSS14.0

CloudBB CPRI O&M capability improvement: This function allows users to maintain and

manage CPRI ports in the CPRI Topo Interface window on the M2000. With this function,

users can perform the following operations:

Query information about optical modules between the BBU and RRUs.

Right-click a BBU or RRU and choose Display SFP Module Information from the shortcut

menu. Then, the M2000 sends an MML command for querying the optical module

information to the NEs, and the NEs respond with query results in MML messages. The

M2000 displays these results in a list. The results include the optical module type, wavelength,

power, and port rate.

Conduct bit error rate (BER) tests for CPRI ports between the BBU and RRUs. CPRI

BER tests are classified into uplink BER tests and downlink BER tests.

On the FARS page of the M2000, right-click a CPRI link and choose Bit Error Rate Test

from the shortcut menu. Then, select an option to start a BER test on the BBU or an RRU.

After a BER test is started, the M2000 delivers a start command to the NEs. Then, the NEs

start the test and periodically report test results to the M2000, which parses the results in real

time and displays them in a graph. Alternatively, the M2000 can save the test results as a file

on the M2000 client so that users can browse the results in offline mode. The display mode

for offline browsing is the same as that for real-time browsing.

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.6.9 GBFD-111203 O&M of BSC

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Page 71: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 71 of 203

Summary

Users access the NE through the LMT or M2000 to perform routine maintenance and

operation such as data configuration, alarm management, security management, performance

data collection and analysis, and loading and upgrading so that the NE functions properly.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

Users can add, delete, modify, query the configured data, and perform various maintenance operations for the NE so that the NE can provide services as required.

Users can monitor and learn about the operating status of the NE in real time to promptly locate and rectify the fault.

Users can upgrade the NE at either the local end or the remote end.

Description

The graphical interface makes the O&M of BSC easy to understand and easy to use. The

O&M of BSC mainly provides the following functions:

Configuration management

The data configuration of the BSC and the BTS under the control of this BSC is

managed. The data configuration for the BSC can be performed on the LMT either online or offline.

Software management

As an important function of the O&M system, software management involves operations

such as loading, management, and activation. The management objects include software

of each board, software patch, license, and BOOTROM. The operations of these four types of software facilitate convenient and proper management of BSC software.

O&M of board

O&M of board involves the reset and switchover of boards, the monitoring of CPU and

DSP, and the reset of subracks or the system. Users perform different operations to solve

the problems or maintain the system in different situations.

System monitoring

System monitoring involves monitoring and offline browsing of the CPU/DSP usage. A

maximum of four objects can be monitored in a task. Multiple monitoring tasks can be

performed at the same time. Monitoring of the CPU/DSP usage enables the users to learn

about the system load in real time.

Query of call resources

Based on the anonymous IMSI or other information of a subscriber provided by the

maintenance personnel, the system queries all the resources the subscriber uses in the

GBSS. These resources include the BTS, sector, TRX, circuits on the Abis interface, Ater

interface information about the BSC, A interface information, TC resources, and board

information. All the information helps maintenance personnel quickly locate problems and faults.

Maintenance of interface and link

Maintenance of interface and link involves the management of LAPD link, SS7 link, and

the trunk circuit on each interface. For example, query of the status of the LAPD link,

SS7 link, and trunk circuit, changing the status of trunk circuit, blocking and unblocking of the LAPD link and SS7 link.

Page 72: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 72 of 203

Time synchronization

Huawei BSC implements the time synchronization with the upper-level NMS through

BAM to complete the synchronization of all NEs managed by a centralized NMS. The

BAM distributes the synchronized clock to all the BSC boards to synchronize all the elements of the system.

Through powerful maintenance functions, the maintenance personnel can quickly get

familiar with the BSC LMT and master the usage of Huawei equipment to maintain Huawei GBSS in a simple and efficient way.

Enhancement

GBSS7.0

E1/T1 transmission BER detection: You can obtain the information on the E1/T1 transmission

quality on the maintenance system. The following information can be viewed: BER, errored

second (ES), errored second ratio (ESR), severely errored second ratio (SESR), number of

frames failed in CRC, and number of synchronization bit check errors. The information

provides the maintenance personnel with a visualized view of the transmission quality. E1/T1

transmission BER detection complies with G.821 specifications.

Operation log reported to the centralized NMS: The BSC supports the query and export of

operation logs by time. The exported logs are saved in .xml format. The BSC compresses the

operation logs and uploads them to the centralized NMS by time or by file size. The

centralized NMS can translate the operation logs in .xml format. It also supports the query by

time.

GBSS8.0

The O&M of the built-in PCU is supported.

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.6.10 GBFD-111207 BTS Test Function

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Page 73: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 73 of 203

Summary

BTS test involves site test, baseband test, baseband idle timeslot test, TCH loopback test,

transmission performance test, cyclic redundancy check (CRC), and BTS antenna fault

detection.

Benefits

One of the major problems faced by all operators is quick and easy location of the cause and

faulty module of the BTS problems.

The OMC at the remote end and local end provided by Huawei GBSS enables the BTS test

and also the centralized and remote BTS test. This facilitates the commissioning at the local

end during installation and also the centralized management through the NMS and the OMC

remotely during the O&M process. Huawei GBSS BTS test feature provides the following

benefits:

Flexible operations are supported. Operators can perform the O&M at either the local end or remote end as required by the engineering or O&M.

Compared with fault management at separated sites, the BTS O&M system provided by

Huawei GBSS reduces the manual operations and the O&M expenditure because

Huawei GBSS supports the centralized management for BTSs under one BSC.

Various test functions help the maintenance personnel to locate the fault and identify the

faulty module without the use of test devices. This enables the automatic problem detection and therefore saves the maintenance expenditure.

Description

Site test: In the site test, the board hardware is tested. The boards can be TMU board, TRX,

and CDU. The hardware test enables early detection and recovery of hardware failure.

Baseband test: Baseband test involves BIU loopback test and TRX self-test. In BIU loopback

test, the timeslot transmission of the TRX signaling channel on the BTS DBUS is tested. The

TRX sends the signaling channel data to the signaling timeslot of the BTS DBUS. After the

loopback through the TMU, the TRX receives the data sent by the TRX itself. The TRX

compares the data with the original data, and then reports the BER to obtain the link quality of

the signaling channel on the BTS DBUS. In TRX self-test, the running status of the TRX is

tested.

Baseband idle timeslot test: During network optimization, you must manually set the network

to maximum interference mode to obtain the maximum interference of the entire network.

This is achieved by sending the dummy burst on all idle timeslots of a specific area. In the test

start command, set the test time to 1 to 24 hours. The test can be stopped automatically by

software or stopped manually on the LMT.

TCH loopback test: TCH loopback test involves BIU loopback test and TRX RF self-loop test.

In the BIU loopback test, the timeslot transmission of the TRX TCH on the BTS DBUS is

tested. The TRX sends the TCH data to the traffic timeslot of the BTS DBUS.

After the loopback through the TMU, the TRX receives the data sent by the TRX itself. The

TRX compares the data with the original data, and then reports the BER to obtain the link

quality of the TCH on the BTS DBUS.

In the TRX RF self-loop test, the quality of the RX channel and TX channel of the TRX is

tested. TRX RF self-test is carried out by the digital signal processing unit in the TRX. Through the baseband processing unit and the loopback of the RF unit, the data is transmitted

Page 74: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 74 of 203

through baseband processing unit again and returned to the digital signal processing unit. The

digital signal processing unit compares the data with the original data and reports the BER to

obtain the quality information regarding the TX and RX channels.

Transmission performance test: The transmission performance of the E1 port specified by the

BTS. The transmission performance information regarding a specified TMU board can be

learned quickly through the E1 loopback test.

Two types of loopback modes are available: E1 loopback and timeslot loopback. When E1

loopback is selected, all the timeslots of a specified E1 port are tested. When timeslot

loopback is selected, the number of the timeslot should be specified. One timeslot can be

tested in one test.

CRC: Operators can decide whether to adopt CRC for the transmission between the BTS and

the BSC.

Enhancement

GBSS7.0

BTS antenna system connection detection: This feature is performed for the deployment and

cutover of the BTS and for the troubleshooting of the BTS antenna system. The feature

involves the call test and antenna system intermodulation detection.

Call test: You can enable the call of a specified MS to traverse handovers on the channels in a

cell on the Site Maintenance System and the BSC host. Therefore, the BTS can test the

channels and then report the test result to the Site Maintenance System through the BSC.

The test result is saved as a file for the analysis by tools. The following issues can be tested:

incorrect connection of the antenna system, main and diversity problems, uplink and

downlink balance, one-way audio, and no audio.

Antenna system intermodulation detection: Interference on each frequency band is detected

through the frequency band scanning.

Co-frequency and adjacent frequency check in one BTS: This function is performed during

data configuration to provide accurate information to operators. This helps to avoid the

configuration of the same frequency and adjacent frequencies for one BTS especially for one

cell due to improper operation. Such configuration may cause intra-network interference, but

if the configuration is confirmed by the operator, it can be issued.

GBSS8.1

Voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) detection: In the early stage of the network deployment,

VSWR is a key item in the acceptance test. A specialized test tool is required to measure the

VSWR on site and to verify the installation of the antenna system.

The VSWR detection function controls the test of the BTS remotely without using any

specialized tools, and therefore reduces the cost because the maintenance personnel do not

need to conduct the test on site.

The maintenance personnel only need to send a VSWR detection command to the BSC

through the M2000 or MML client. The BSC then forwards the command to the BTS. The

BTS configures the test mode and then carries out the VSWR test. After that, the BTS restores

to the work mode.

After the test, the BSC reports the test result to the M2000 or MML client. On the M2000,

you can perform VSWR tests in batches and set the VSWR threshold. The precision of the

Page 75: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 75 of 203

reported VSWR is 0.01 with a deviation more than ±0.2 in comparison with the VSWR

obtained by using a specialized tool.

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.6.11 GBFD-111210 Integrated Network Management Interface

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

GBSS products access Huawei mobile integrated network management system M2000

through the integrated network management interface.

Benefits

The M2000 is located in the element management-layer (EM-layer) of the telecommunication

management network (TMN) model. It provides a network management interface for the

upper-level network management system (NMS).

This feature provides the following benefits:

The integrated operation and maintenance of the GBSS can be implemented on the

M2000.

The upper-level NMS or the NMS of other vendors can be accessed through the

northbound interface provided by the M2000.

Description

The M2000 is an integrated management system on NE level. It supports the integrated

operation and maintenance of mobile devices. With flexible access modes, the remote

network element devices can access the M2000 through the wide area network (WAN). The

LMT can be placed anywhere on the network. In normal communications, the centralized

maintenance is performed; when the communication with the M2000 is interrupted, the local

maintenance is initiated. In addition, the M2000 provides the northbound interface to access

the upper-level network management system or the network management system of other

vendors.

Page 76: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 76 of 203

The GBSS accesses the M2000 through the integrated network management interface of the

LMT. In addition, users can implement functions such as software management, configuration,

maintenance, alarm management, performance statistics, and security management through

the integrated network management interface.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

The M2000 must support this feature.

1.6.12 GBFD-116501 Man Machine Language (MML)

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0.

Summary

The BSS supports NE operation and maintenance through MML commands.

Benefits

MML stands for man machine language. In the daily operation and maintenance, compared

with GUI, MML is more effective and supports the scripts.

This feature provides the following benefits:

Supporting the maintenance of the BSS through MML commands

Maintaining one or more NEs through MML scripts

Description

The BSS supports NE operation and maintenance by running MML commands on the M2000

or LMT. Compared with GUI, MML is more effective. You can configure and maintain

multiple NEs by running MML scripts or performing multiple operations on one NE. MML

improves maintenance efficiency, reduces improper manual operations, and greatly reduces

O&M cost of operators.

The MML command supports the following operation modes:

Page 77: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 77 of 203

− Entering MML commands and parameters directly.

− Entering MML commands and parameters through the GUI.

− Providing the MML batch processing function. Many MML commands are written in

a file. The LMT reads the MML commands in the file and executes these commands automatically.

− Instant and timed batch processing.

− Recording the MML commands and saving the results of the execution of the MML commands automatically.

− Recording operations in the operation logs.

− MML pre-activation.

The MML command supports the following operation modes:

− Configuring data, including the BTS data using the MML commands.

− Performing alarm maintenance functions such as browsing, querying, and manually

recovering alarms, configuring environment alarms, and shielding alarms using MML

commands.

− Maintaining BSC devices, transmission devices, signaling links, and interfaces. That

is, using the MML commands, you can maintain the BSC and transmission devices, such as status query and board switchover.

− Maintaining BTS boards and TRXs.

− Collecting data files (including logs, performance files, and alarm files) to the LMT.

− Performing security management functions such as adding, deleting, and modifying

user information, managing rights of the users, and querying operation logs.

− Performing software management functions such as upgrading the BSC software,

BTS software, patches, and maintaining the BIOS and license.

− Performing other functions such as setting time and DST.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

Page 78: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 78 of 203

1.6.13 GBFD-116402 Maintenance Mode Alarm

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Summary

This feature distinguishes the maintenance mode alarms from the ordinary alarms to avoid the

impact of the maintenance mode alarms on the ordinary alarms.

Benefits

This feature prevents sudden increase in the number of alarms during engineering operations

such as network upgrade and maintenance, improving the network maintenance efficiency.

Description

With the network operation and development, the engineering operations such as network

upgrade, capacity expansion, and commissioning of the BSS system are inevitable. Therefore,

a large number of maintenance mode alarms are generated because of the temporary state of

the engineering operations. If these alarms are not separated from the ordinary alarms, the

ordinary alarms generated by the BTS/BSC are masked. This greatly affects the operators'

normal monitoring of the network.

This feature distinguishes the maintenance mode alarms from the ordinary alarms. By setting

the engineering object before engineering operations, the EMS/NMS system can distinguish

the maintenance mode alarms from the ordinary alarms. In addition, the EMS/NMS system

can configure the receiving strategy of the maintenance mode alarms and filter out the

maintenance mode alarms, reducing the impact of the maintenance mode alarms on the

system load.

This feature supports configuration of the BTS or the BSC as the engineering object. When

the BTS is configured as the engineering object, all the related device alarms, service alarms,

and transmission alarms are maintenance mode alarms. When the BSC is configured as the

engineering object, all the BSC alarms and the alarms about the BTSs managed by the BSC

are maintenance mode alarms. The duration of the maintenance mode alarm can be set. The

engineering object is restored to non-engineering object after the set duration. The alarms

generated by the non-engineering object are viewed as ordinary alarms.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

Page 79: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 79 of 203

None

Dependency on other NEs

The following M2000 feature must be activated:

WOFD-014300 Maintenance Mode Management

1.6.14 GBFD-113523 NAT Beside OM

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Summary

With this feature, the network address translation (NAT) firewall is deployed on the LMT side

and the M2000 side to maintain the network security without affecting the normal connections

between devices.

Benefits

Firewall is a basic technology to maintain the network security. The NAT firewall protects the

internal network by hiding the internal network address through the NAT technology.

Therefore, the network security is enhanced. According to the actual requirements, the

customer can deploy the NAT firewall as follows:

Deploy the NAT firewall on the M2000 to prevent the attack from the network.

Deploy the NAT firewall on the LMT so that multiple LMTs on the same network segment are

connected to the GBSC by using the same IP address, saving the public network IP resources.

Description

To ensure the GBSS network security, the NAT firewall needs to be deployed between the

GBSC and the LMT or the M2000. The NAT technology converts the IP address in the IP

header to another IP address. Through the NAT firewall, the IP address and port number in the

IP packet of the network device are changed. The GBSC is interconnected to the LMT and the

M2000. When one side initiates the connection, the other side cannot be normally connected

because the new IP address and port number of the other side are inaccessible.

The NAT beside OM feature supports the deployment of the NAT firewall on the M2000 and

the LMT but not on the GBSC. After starting the NAT firewall, configure the GBSC as the

server and the M2000 and the LMT as the clients. Then, initiate the connections from the

M2000 and the LMT to the GBSC. In this manner, the GBSC can be connected normally

because the IP address of the GBSC is not converted through the NAT technology.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Page 80: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 80 of 203

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.7 Software Management

1.7.1 MRFD-210401 BSC/RNC Software Management

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary

This feature provides functions of software installation, software upgrade, and patch

installation of the MBSC. This facilitates the remote management of the MBSC software.

Benefits

This feature provides functions of software installation, software upgrade, and patch

installation of the MBSC, reducing the O&M cost for operators.

Description

The MBSC supports the software management. This feature facilitates the remote

management of the MBSC software. The operators can run the MML commands to:

Query the information about the software version and other information about the

running system.

Upload, download, and activate the program file, patch file, and license file, and copy the data files and log files to the FTP server.

Use the BAM server of the MBSC as the FTP server and transmit files such as program file and patch file by using the wildcard between the FTP server and the FTP client.

Perform the remote patch upgrade of the BAM server of the MBSC.

Use the MBSC as the transmission medium to transmit files between the M2000 and the

MBTS.

In addition, the operators can control the product software through the operation and

maintenance center (OMC), including the program, patch, license, data, and log. The OMC

can identify and match the product software version. In this way, the efficiency of product

upgrade and data downloading is improved.

Page 81: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 81 of 203

Enhancement

UMTS

RAN5.1 supports the remote patch upgrade of the RNC BAM.

RAN6.1 supports the software management based on two versions, facilitating the upgrade

and rollback of versions.

RAN10.0 supports the combined patch management functions of the BAM and RBS.

RAN11.0 supports the validity check of the configuration scripts before upgrade and supports

the verification of the system configuration after upgrade. This reduces manual intervention

during upgrade and improves the upgrade efficiency and reliability.

RAN11.0 significantly shortens the duration of service disruption caused by the upgrade of a

fully-configured RNC. In this way, the upgrade with a minimal loss, which is applicable only

to the BSC6810, is achieved.

GSM

GBSS8.1 supports the remote upgrade of the BSC and BTS software.

GBSS13.0

Software digital signature of the controller: The integrity and correctness of the software are

ensured through the software digital signature solution. The software digital signature is a

solution where digital signature is added to the software and the information containing the

digital signature is compressed into the software package before the product software is

released. When the M2000 delivers the software to NEs or the software is directly loaded to

NEs, it verifies the digital signature. The software package is considered as integrate, reliable,

and usable only after it passes the verification. Otherwise, the software package is considered

as illegal.

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

The M2000 must support this feature.

1.7.2 MRFD-210402 BTS/NodeB Software Management

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Page 82: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 82 of 203

Summary

This feature enables the operator to remotely manage the software installation and upgrade of

the MBTS. This feature supports enhanced functions such as automatic change of the

signaling bandwidth, software downloading based on the configuration, software

downloading resumption, downloading and activation of software in batches, and hot

patching.

Benefits

This feature provides efficient and accurate software installation, software upgrade, and

software version management.

Description

This feature helps the operator to remotely manage the MBTS software. The operator can

perform the following operations through MML commands:

Efficient and correct installation and upgrade of the software

Check on compatibility of the software and hardware versions to ensure successful

software installation and upgrade

Version management, for example, the hardware and software version query

Automatic data conversion during the software upgrade

The process of upgrading the software of the network element is as follows:

Download the software package from the OMC M2000 to the MBTS through the OMCH.

Run the software activation command on the OMC M2000 client.

The MBTS automatically loads the software to the corresponding board and switches over the active and standby directories on the MBTS.

The following are the enhancement features of the MBTS software management:

UBR/UBR+ is supported on the OMCH. When the traffic is heavy, the OMCH rate is

fixed at 64 kbit/s. When the traffic is light, the OMCH bandwidth is automatically increased to increase the software downloading efficiency.

Software downloading based on the configuration can reduce 30% of the software

package and shorten the downloading time. When a board is added, the system supports

only the software downloading for the corresponding board to improve the downloading efficiency.

If the network recovers in 24 hours after the network breakdown, the system supports

software downloading resumption to avoid that the software is downloaded repeatedly.

A maximum of 500 MBTSs can be selected to download and activate the software in batches automatically. The default value is 50 MBTSs in one batch.

Hot patching without resetting the MBTS is supported to minimize the negative impact on the traffic.

Enhancement

In RAN5.1, the following enhancement features are introduced:

UBR supported on the OMCH

Page 83: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 83 of 203

Software downloading based on the configuration

Software downloading resumption

Downloading and activation of the software in batches

Hot patching

GBSS9.0

The hot patching is introduced that BTS do not need to restart.

GBSS12.0

Remote Loading Speed Improvement of BTS Software: The speed of BTS/NodeB

software remote loading is increased. The time required for software loading is shortened to

15 to 20 minutes for one BTS.

GBSS13.0

GBSS integrity check: This function ensures the software accuracy and integrity using the

software digital signature scheme. With this function, the MBTS checks and verifies the

digital signature when loading the software. If the verification passes, the MBTS regards that

the software package is complete and reliable. If the verification fails, the MBTS regards that

the software package is invalid.

GBSS14.0

The BTS3900E and BTS3900B support the GBSS integrity check function.

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

The M2000 must support this feature.

1.7.3 GBFD-111213 Remote Upgrade of the BSC&BTS Software

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Summary

Remote upgrade of the BSC&BTS software involves the remote upgrade of the BSC and BTS

software.

Page 84: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 84 of 203

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature is especially applicable to the system upgrade in the rural area. Multiple

network elements can be upgraded simultaneously without local operation, improving the working efficiency of the maintenance personnel.

The upgrade of the GBSS can be remotely implemented on the M2000. As this feature

supports batch upgrade of multiple network elements, this can save the time and

workload of the maintenance personnel, and reduce the time of the service disruption caused by the system upgrade.

The remote software upgrade can be implemented through the GUI of the M2000 for ease of operation.

Description

Remote upgrade of the BSC&BTS software involves the remote upgrade of the BSC and BTS

software, and the automatic remote upgrade of the LMT.

Remote upgrade of the BSC software

Huawei BSS supports remote upgrade of the host software and OMU software of the

BSC through the integrated network management system (M2000). The remote upgrade

of the BSC software provides downloading, uploading, and activation of the BSC host

software and OMU software. In case the upgrade fails, this function also enables the

rollback of the BSC software version and data configuration. After the software is loaded

successfully, the system automatically loads and activates the license file. The remote

upgrade also supports the upgrade of the cold patches and hot patches.

Remote upgrade of the BTS software

The remote upgrade of the BTS software involves three steps: downloading the BTS

software to the BSC from the M2000, loading the BTS software to the BTS boards

through the BSC, and activating the BTS software of the BTS boards through the BSC.

After the BTS software is downloaded to the BSC through the M2000, both the one-key

upgrade and the automatic upgrade are supported. In the case of one-key upgrade, the

maintenance personnel load and activate the BTS software through the M2000. In the

case of automatic upgrade, the maintenance personnel configure the information about

the BTS software version to be upgraded and then the BSC automatically upgrades the BTS software without manual intervention.

Automatic LMT remote upgrade

LMT is the GUI-based maintenance terminal of the GBSC. The LMT version must

match the GBSC version. To simplify the maintenance, the GBSC downloads the

corresponding LMT version through the M2000 during the GBSC software upgrade. The

LMT is then installed automatically and restarted. If the LMT automatic installation fails,

the LMT is rolled back to the previous version. To avoid downloading the LMT

installation package for each upgrade, you can download the patch package and install only the updated part.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

Page 85: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 85 of 203

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

The M2000 must support this feature.

1.7.4 MRFD-210403 License Management

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary

This feature involves the MBSC license control and MBTS license control.

Benefits

With this feature, the operators can purchase the license based on the network development,

reducing the initial cost of the network deployment.

Description

The license file is used to determine whether the optional features are available and how many

optional features are available.

The MBSC and the BTS share one license file. The NodeB uses its own license file. The

license files can be downloaded remotely to the MBSC and NodeB. The operators can

manage and query the contents in the license file through the LMT or the M2000 client.

Page 86: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 86 of 203

The characteristics of the MBSC (include BTS) license management are as follows:

The MBSC and the BTS share one license file.

The license file is downloaded from the M2000 and is controlled and activated on the MBSC side.

The license can be used within one MBSC but not between the MBSCs.

The characteristics of the NodeB license management are as follows:

All the NodeBs under one RNC share one license file. That is, one RNS corresponds to

one license file. Each license file records the license information about all NodeBs in the RNS.

The license is distributed on the M2000 and is controlled by the NodeB. The distribution

results are sent to the NodeB from the M2000.

The license information can be distributed between NodeBs but not between RNCs. The total number of a control item cannot exceed the number recorded in the license file.

New or upgraded license files can be ordered from Huawei.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

Page 87: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 87 of 203

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

The M2000 must support this feature.

1.8 GBSS Network Architecture

1.8.1 GBFD-114601 Multi-Cell Function

Availability

This feature was available from GBSS6.1.

Summary

When this feature is enabled, one BTS can be configured with up to 12 cells.

Benefits

This feature meets the requirement for special networking and saves the investment of

operators.

Description

In some special scenarios, one BTS is required to support more than three cells. In the

GSM900/DCS1800 dual-band networking, the following configurations are required:

GSM900 Sx/x/x and DCS1800 Sy/y/y. In this case, one BTS should be configured with six

cells.

In Huawei GBSS, one BTS supports up to 12 cells and meets the requirements of special

networking scenarios, especially the dual-band networking. This saves the investment of

operators.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Page 88: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 88 of 203

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.8.2 GBFD-111501 BTS Combined Cabinet

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

With BTS combined cabinets, the capacity of the BTS site is greatly increased.

Benefits

The high-capacity sites can reduce the construction cost of the equipment rooms for operators.

Therefore, the deployment of large sites in urban areas helps to reduce the number of sites,

increase the network capacity, and save the construction cost.

Description

The number of TRXs available in one BTS cabinet is limited; therefore, if the number of

TRXs required by the synchronous cells is greater than one BTS cabinet can handle, then the

combined cabinets should be used. A maximum of two BTS cabinets can be combined into a

cabinet group. With the high-capacity sites, operators can reduce the construction cost of the

equipment rooms. Therefore, the deployment of large sites in urban areas helps to reduce the

number of sites, increase the network capacity, and save the construction cost.

In combined cabinets, the cabinet configured with the main control unit is the basic cabinet

and the cabinet not configured with the main control unit is the extension cabinet. The basic

cabinet and extension cabinet share the common boards. The clock signals, data, O&M

signals are transmitted from the basic cabinet to the extension cabinet through certain cabling.

The capability of combined cabinets supported by the BTS is as follows:

The BTS312 and BTS3012 support the combination of two cabinets while the BTS3006C and

BTS3002E support the combination of three cabinets.

The BTS3002C, BTS3012II, and BTS3012AE do not support the combination of cabinets.

For the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and DBS3900, one BBU supports the maximum cell

configuration of S12/12/12.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Page 89: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 89 of 203

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.8.3 GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

With BTS hybrid cabinet group, the capacity of the BTS site is greatly increased.

Benefits

The BTS hybrid cabinet group feature increases the capacity of the current network and

facilitates the smooth network upgrade for improved network performance and increased

functions.

Description

Regardless of the number of cabinets that constitute the cabinet group, one cabinet group

supports a maximum of 24 TRXs. If the number of TRXs in a synchronous cell exceeds 24,

then multiple cabinet groups should be combined. Generally, this is used for capacity

expansion. The cabinets that constitute the cabinet group can be of the same type or of

different types. The total number of TRXs in a cabinet group of a synchronous site cannot

exceed 72.

The cabinet group that provides the clock sources for the cells is called the basic cabinet

group, which is configured with one or two TMU boards; the other cabinet groups are called

extension cabinet groups. The basic cabinet in a cabinet group can be configured with one

TMU board. The E1 cables connect the TMU boards of the basic cabinets. The clock signals

and O&M signaling between the cabinet groups are transmitted over the cabling between the

basic cabinet of the basic cabinet group and the basic cabinet of an extension cabinet, and then

the clock signals and O&M signaling are transmitted from the basic cabinet of a cabinet group

to the extension cabinet of the cabinet group.

The capability of cabinet groups supported by the BTS is as follows:

Cabinet group of the same cabinet type:

The BTS312 and BTS3012 support three cabinet groups, each with two combined cabinets,

enabling an S24/24/24 synchronous site.

The BTS3012II supports the grouping of three cabinets, enabling an S18/18/18 synchronous

site.

The BTS3012AE supports the grouping of three cabinets, enabling an S12/12/12 synchronous

site.

The BTS3006C supports two cabinet groups, each with three combined cabinets, enabling an S12/12/12 synchronous site.

Page 90: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 90 of 203

The BTS3002E supports two cabinet groups, each with three combined cabinets, enabling an

S4/4/4 synchronous site.

The cabinet group is not applicable to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and DBS3900.

Cabinet group of different cabinet types:

The BTS3012 can be grouped with the BTS312 and BTS30.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.8.4 GBFD-118801 BSC Cabinet/Subrack Sharing

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0.

Summary

Based on the Platform of Advanced Radio Controller (PARC), BSC cabinet/subrack sharing

enables the BSC, TC, PCU, and MGW to share one cabinet.

Benefits

Currently, operators become more and more concerned about the cost, so the reduction of

equipment construction and maintenance costs becomes increasingly important. This feature

enables operators to reduce the cost from the following aspects and to realize smooth

evolution from 2G network to 3G network.

The shared-cabinet technique helps to achieve network integration, save the equipment

floor space, and reduce the O&M cost.

Multiple equipment that share one cabinet can unify the maintenance for 2G and 3G networks, the access and core networks. Then, the O&M cost is reduced.

Page 91: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 91 of 203

Description

Cabinet sharing among the BSC, TC, and MGW: Huawei BSC allows the BSC, TC, and

MGW to share one cabinet for reducing space and cost. Huawei softswitch products include

the MSC server (MSS) and MGW. The MSC server is responsible for call control and

signaling, and the MGW is responsible for switching and service bearing.

The equipment can be deployed in a distributed way: The MSC server is deployed in the

center of a big city and the MGW is deployed in a place close to the access network. With this

optimized networking configuration, the calling party and called party are controlled by the

same MGW and the voice data is only switched in the MGW instead of the MSC server,

saving transmission resources.

Enhancement

GBSS8.0

Subrack sharing among the BSC, TC, and PCU: Huawei BSC allows the BSC, TC, and PCU

to share one subrack. One subrack can provide CS services and PS services. Then, one cabinet

can provide CS services and PS services for 2,048 TRXs. Therefore, the system integration is

greatly improved and the space and O&M cost are reduced.

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.8.5 MBFD-210204 Star Topology

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary

With this feature, each MBTS is directly connected to the MBSC through the transmission

link.

Benefits

Star topology is a traditional networking scheme. The network architecture is simple and the

link reliability is high. Therefore, the maintenance cost is reduced.

Page 92: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 92 of 203

Description

The star topology applies to urban areas, especially densely populated areas. In star topology,

each MBTS is directly connected to the MBSC through the transmission link. The MBTSs are

mutually independent. Therefore, the network architecture is simple. This topology usually

applies to sites in large configuration.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.8.6 MBFD-210205 Chain Topology

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary

With this feature, the MBTSs can be connected in chain topology.

Benefits

Chain topology is a traditional networking scheme. With this feature, the timeslot switching

function of the MBTS enables the timeslots of an MBTS to be shared with the lower-level

MBTSs for transmission. Therefore, the transmission cost and investment on the timeslot

switching device are saved.

Description

The chain topology is used along the highways or railway tracks and in sparsely populated

areas. It can greatly save the transmission resources. In some cases, multiple E1 links can be

used for transmission in chain topology. The levels of MBTSs in chain topology should not

exceed five.

Enhancement

None

Page 93: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 93 of 203

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

This feature is mutually exclusive with the following feature:

GBFD-118601 Abis over IP

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.8.7 MBFD-210206 Tree Topology

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary

With this feature, the MBTSs can be connected in tree topology.

Benefits

Tree topology is a traditional networking scheme and applies to the microwave transmission

network. With this feature, the timeslot switching function of the MBTS enables the timeslots

of an MBTS to be shared with the lower-level MBTSs for transmission. Therefore, the

transmission cost and investment on the timeslot switching device are saved.

Description

The tree topology is used in the large and sparsely populated areas. The tree topology has a

lower demand for the transmission cables than the star topology. The transmission reliability,

however, is reduced and the construction and maintenance are complicated because signals

pass through many nodes. In addition, the fault in one MBTS may affect the normal operation

of its lower-level MBTSs. The tree topology applies to areas in which the subscriber

distribution is complicated. In addition, capacity expansion is difficult because it may involve

big modification of the network architecture.

In tree topology, the MBTS obtains the clock signals by locking to the upper-level network.

Each phase-lock can decrease the quality of the clock signals. Therefore, the levels of MBTSs

must not exceed five.

Enhancement

None

Page 94: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 94 of 203

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

This feature is mutually exclusive with the following feature:

GBFD-118601 Abis over IP

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.8.8 GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Summary

This feature provides an IP-based connection between BSCs for information exchange.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

Provides a direct transmission path between BSCs.

Provides a direct channel to exchange information between BSCs and enables the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network and IBCA functions.

Description

The IP-based inter-BSC connection enables operators to use the IP network to connect the

BSCs so that the BSCs can communicate with each other directly. This feature is applicable to

the scenarios of inter-BSC information exchange. For example, when the inter-BSC

soft-synchronized network or the IBCA is enabled, this feature is required. The inter-BSC

connection supports only the inter-BSC signaling switching. The CS or PS is not supported.

The BSC must be configured with the IP interface board. Huawei IP interface boards support

FE and GE interfaces, which support the IPv4 protocol. The BSCs in the same equipment

room may be connected through layer 2 switches. The BSCs in different equipment rooms

may be connected through layer 3 switches. The interconnection method depends on the local

network planning of the BSC.

Enhancement

None

Page 95: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 95 of 203

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

If Abis over IP or A over IP is applied, the IP interface boards of two BSCs can be connected

through the switches. If Abis over IP or A over IP is not applied, a pair of IP interface boards

needs to be added to each BSC.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.9 System Reliability

1.9.1 GBFD-111701 Board Switchover

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

In daily operations, the active board takes charge of the normal operation of the services and

the standby one performs real-time backup for the active board. When the active board is

faulty, the services are switched to the standby board for continuous operation of the system.

Benefits

The reliability of the BSS and the MTBF of the system is greatly improved, and the service

disruptions caused by the faults of a board are reduced.

Description

To ensure the reliable operation for the system, Huawei GBSS provides redundancy solutions

for all the boards (except for the boards designed for the resource pool), that is, the boards are

classified into the active board and the standby board. The active board processes services

while the standby board performs real-time backup for the active one. If the active board is

faulty or needs to be replaced, the services can be switched over to the standby board. In this

way, the system can work continuously.

There are two kinds of switchovers. One is automatic switchover. That is, the services are

automatically switched over from the active board to the standby board. Another one is

manual switchover. That is, the maintenance personnel perform the board switchover on the

LMT. The maintenance personnel send an immediate switchover command to the system, and

a specially designed maintenance module instructs relevant boards to perform switchover.

Page 96: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 96 of 203

To perform the active/standby switchover successfully, the following conditions must be met:

The standby board must be in position and work normally. No major or critical alarm is

reported. When the standby board is switched over to the active one, the original active board

will reset automatically. If this board starts normally, it will be the standby one. In this way,

the boards are kept in backup status.

The boards that support the board switchover include the GOMU, GGCU, GSCU, GTNU,

GXPUM, and all types of interface boards. The service processing boards such as the

GDPUX are designed in the resource pool mode.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.9.2 GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

When the system is overloaded, the system reduces the traffic of the access system or disables

some maintenance functions according to the priorities. In this way, the normal operation of

the main services in the system is ensured, and the normal traffic and load can be restored in a

relatively short time.

Benefits

This feature ensures the stable and reliable operation of the system.

Description

When the system load exceeds the processing capability due to excessive traffic volume or

other causes, the BSC initiates the flow control and takes measures for the normal provision

of important services. In this way, the system robustness is improved.

GBSS flow control involves the internal flow control and traffic flow control.

Page 97: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 97 of 203

The internal flow control prevents load increase caused by O&M or restricts some supporting

functions when the traffic is relatively high. This protects the system against breakdown and

ensures the successful access of user services.

Service flow control restricts some common services to ensure the provision of key services

when the traffic exceeds certain level. In this way, the system load can be restored to normal

quickly. When the network sends many paging messages or many MSs access the network at

the same time, the services may not be processed in time. In this case, the system may discard

some paging messages or reject some access requests, so that the traffic can be controlled

within a defined range.

In terms of the service design, the system performs different protections on different levels to

maintain the KPIs in the normal state when the traffic is overloaded in some areas caused by

the imbalance of the service distribution. In this case, the flow control involves the RSL flow

control, flow control of the single BTS, and overload protection of the TRX.

By using flow control algorithms of different levels, the system automatically provides the

flow control protection after the services exceed the system specifications, and takes measures

to stabilize the system load, maintaining the user service within the range allowed by the

system and ensuring the robustness of the system to prevent the breakdown caused by the

overload. In addition, the system can automatically change the restriction measures according

to the decrease in the load. In this way, the system load can be restored to normal quickly.

Enhancement

GBSS9.0

Flow control for A interface boards is added to prevent board resets. Main processing

unit (MPU) flow control and backpressure are also added. If signaling is configured for

one A interface board, the processing capability of the CPU on that board becomes insufficient and therefore the system capacity is limited.

PS paging flow control is added and the PS paging priority is decreased.

Flow control for PIU interface boards is added.

GBSS14.0

Flow control for signaling over the A interface is added. If the signaling links over the A

interface are congested or the processing capability of the CN is insufficient, the BSC

restricts the traffic access volume to meet the signaling processing capability of the A

interface. This prevents severe signaling congestion over the A interface and therefore increases the valid traffic volume.

The emergency call preemption function is added. When transmission resources are

insufficient, emergency calls are allowed to preempt transmission resources occupied by common calls. This ensures that emergency calls can be successfully set up.

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

Page 98: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 98 of 203

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.9.3 GBFD-112301 Remote EAC Maintenance

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

This feature supports the remote EAC maintenance.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

Improves the maintenance efficiency

Reduces the O&M cost for the operators

Description

The remote EAC maintenance feature allows the users to query data, set parameters, and run

commands on the BTS environment monitor device through the LMT.

After the EAC is configured, 32-channel Boolean value input/digital value input, 8-channel

digital value output, and 8-channel analog input are supported. The burglar alarm, temperature

alarm, humidity alarm, fire alarm, and other alarms are also supported. This feature allows the

users to query data, set parameters and execute commands on the BTS environment monitor

device through the LMT, including reset and clear the burglar alarm, set the thresholds of the

temperature and humidity, set the alarm, and query the temperature or humidity. Once

generated, the environment alarm should be reported to the central equipment room, and then

the maintenance personnel should be notified for further processing.

The EAC can be maintained remotely, improving the maintenance efficiency.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Page 99: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 99 of 203

Dependency on other NEs

The environment monitoring device is required.

1.9.4 GBFD-111214 Operation & Maintenance System One-Key Recovery

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

This feature supports the quick recovery of the operating system or the configuration data.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

Reduces the complexity of the backup and recovery of the operating system or the

configuration data of the GOMU or the BAM server.

Reduces the time of the service disruption caused by the operation and maintenance.

Description

The O&M system of Huawei BSS includes the GBAM and GOMU. Both adopt the Linux

operating system. If the operating system is corrupted, you can run commands to recover the

operating system by connecting a PC that supports the boot from CD-ROM to the GOMU or

BAM server.

The CD-ROM delivered with Huawei equipment contains the initial backup of the system,

and operators can restore the BSC to the default state. In addition, operators can back up the

BSC operating system or configuration data at any time, and restore the system to the status of

the backup time.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

Page 100: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 100 of 203

1.9.5 GBFD-111211 Reporting the Temperature List of the BTS Equipment Room

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0.

Summary

This feature supports the temperature monitoring switch of the BTS equipment room,

real-time query, and downloading of the temperature information log of the BTS equipment

room.

Benefits

The temperature of the BTS equipment room affects the ventilation of the BTS equipment

room and the power consumption of the air conditioner. In addition, it may cause a fire

warning.

As the operational expenditure of mobile operators increases, maintaining the functionality

and reducing the manpower of the operation and maintenance have become an effective

method of reducing the cost. This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature not only reduces the manpower of the O&M and check, but also helps

operators monitor the temperature of the BTS equipment room. In addition, the air

conditioner can be remotely adjusted by other ways according to the actual situation. In

this way, the energy consumption can be reduced and operators achieve the aim of

becoming green operators.

This feature not only reduces the manpower, but also finds the safety problems in

advance such as the abnormal temperature change, fire, and outside damage.

Description

This feature can start and stop the detection of the temperature information of the BTS

equipment room.

The detection of the temperature information of the BTS equipment room is started or stopped

through the site maintenance terminal or LMT. Users can set the period of reporting the

temperature of the BTS equipment room. A message is displayed on the site maintenance

terminal or LMT, indicating whether the reporting of the temperature information of the BTS

equipment room is started or stopped successfully.

On the M2000 client, you can download the files of the temperature of the equipment room

from the OMU in FTP mode. In addition, you can also query the files of the temperature

information of the equipment room and save the query results on the client.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

Page 101: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 101 of 203

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.9.6 MRFD-210101 System Redundancy

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary

This feature provides the reliability designs such as the active/standby mode, load sharing,

and redundancy configuration, improving the system reliability.

Benefits

This feature improves the system stability and therefore ensures the network performance.

Description

To ensure the reliable operation of the system, reliability designs such as the active/standby

mode, load sharing, and redundancy configuration are widely used in Huawei GBSS/RAN.

In resource pool mode, the load sharing is performed among processing units in the pool. The

processing unit is not backed up. When one or multiple processing units are faulty, the

ongoing services are interrupted, and the new services requests are allocated to other normal

processing units in the resource pool.

In active/standby mode, the active board processes services while the standby board acts as a

backup of the active one. If the active board is faulty or needs to be replaced, the services can

be switched over to the standby board. In this way, the system can work continuously.

There are two types of switchover. One is automatic switchover. That is, the services are

automatically switched over from the active board to the standby board when the active board

is faulty. The other one is manual switchover. That is, the maintenance personnel perform the

board switchover on the LMT. If the active/standby switchover is allowed, a dedicated

maintenance module instructs the relevant boards to perform the switchover after the

maintenance engineer sends an immediate switchover command to the system.

To perform the active/standby switchover successfully, the following conditions must be met:

The standby board must be in position and work normally.

No major or critical alarm is reported.

When the standby board is switched over to the active one, the original active board will reset

automatically. If this board restarts normally, it becomes the standby one. In this way, the boards still work in active/standby mode.

Page 102: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 102 of 203

Redundancy configuration consists of the following units: boards, transmission interfaces,

power, and fans. The software version and important data configuration file are backed up to

ensure that the system works normally even if exception occurs in the file or data.

For the BSC6900, the dual-switching system of the control plane and user plane is applied. In

addition, the resource pool of control plane and user plane is designed. For the service

processing boards, the resource pool is adopted. That is, load-sharing is performed in the

resource pool. For other boards, the backup mode is adopted. That is, the boards of the same

type in two neighboring slots work in active/standby mode. The resource pool is

independently established within the GSM or UMTS.

Huawei BTS/NodeB supports the board-level backup. Two boards of the same type work in

active/standby mode. When the active board is faulty, an active/standby switchover is

performed and the previously standby board works in active mode.

For the interface board, the board backup mode is adopted. Some interface boards support the

standard backup modes specified in protocols, such as MSP 1+1 or MSP 1:1. When detecting

that the board is faulty, the system re-establishes the transmission of the ongoing services on

the standby board by adopting an active/standby switchover. When detecting that the active

channel is damaged, the system enables the transmission of the ongoing services to recover on

the standby channel by adopting an active/standby switchover.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.9.7 MRFD-210102 Operate System Security Management

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0 and RAN10.0.

Summary

This feature provides the customized security policy and patch management for the operating

system on the OMU.

Page 103: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 103 of 203

Benefits

This feature ensures system reliability and prevents the security threats and attacks on the

operating system.

Description

This feature provides the customized security policy and patch management for the operating

system on the OMU.

Customized security management of the operating system:

The customized security policy protects the operating system from being attacked and

therefore enhances the security of the operating system. This feature can be applied to the

Windows 2003 Server and the Linux operating system. The customize security policies are as

follows:

Execution policy

You can execute one or more policies and record the execution results in log files.

Rollback policy

After executing a security policy, if you want to restore the system to the previous state or

customize the policy again, then you can restore the executed policy.

Generating backup files

You can save the current status of a policy into a file. This file can be used as a backup for

rollback.

Saving settings

You can save the current policy settings.

Exporting settings

You can export the current policy settings to another file.

Importing settings

You can import the file containing the policy settings into the system. In this way, the system

has the same settings.

Importing the configuration file of the earlier version

You can import the configuration file of the earlier version to the SetWin.

Reloading the configuration file

The SetWin/SetSuse has an inherent configuration file. You can reload this configuration file

to the SetWin/SetSuse.

Patch management of the operating system:

Based on the type of the operating system, you can timely perform the patch compatibility test

to ensure that the patch is valid. The patch list corresponding to the operating system is

provided at least twice a year.

Enhancement

None

Page 104: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 104 of 203

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.9.8 MRFD-210103 Link Aggregation

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS9.0 and RAN11.0.

Summary

This feature supports the transmission of two combined FEs, improving the reliability of FE

transmission and meeting the requirements of higher data flow.

Benefits

This feature provides the method for improving the transmission reliability.

Description

Huawei GBSS/RAN implements the link aggregation based on IEEE802.3ad, improving the

system reliability and providing higher bandwidth.

This feature applies to the scenario where high reliability is required, for example, on the

ports of the MBSC and the hub NodeB where links are bundled together.

Figure 1-3 Networking for Link Aggregation

Interface

board 1

Interface

board 2

Router 1 RNC

Interface board

1

Interface

board 2

Router 2 Hub NODEB

Bearer

network

Interface board 1

Interface

board 2

Interface

board 1

Interface

board 2

Enhancement

None

Page 105: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 105 of 203

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

IP interface board is needed.

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

The transmission equipment that is connected to the BSC/RNC must support this feature.

1.9.9 MRFD-210104 BSC/RNC Resource Sharing

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS9.0 and RAN10.0.

Summary

This feature provides the resource sharing of the user plane and control plane in the MBSC by

adopting the intra-subrack/inter-subrack load sharing mechanism of boards.

Benefits

This feature improves the resource utilization and increases the call success rate. It also

maximizes the capacity usage in different traffic modes.

Description

The BSC/RNC Resource Sharing feature is classified into user plane resource sharing and

control plane resource sharing.

Control plane resource sharing applies to CPU usage and memory. When the CPU usage of a

certain signaling processing unit is too high or when the memory of a certain signaling

process unit is insufficient, the new call is transferred to other signaling processing unit with a

low load.

User plane resources are shared dynamically within the system based on resource pool and

load sharing. If a certain user plane processing unit is overloaded, the new traffic can be

allocated to other user plane processing unit with lower load.

For the MBSC, the service type-based resource pools are as follows: GSM control plane

resource, GSM user plane resource, UMTS control plane resource, and UMTS user plane

resource. The resource sharing within the pool is supported, but the resource sharing between

pools is not supported.

Enhancement

None

Page 106: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 106 of 203

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.9.10 GBFD-117804 Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS9.0.

Summary

If a BTS uses an AC power input and the power switch unit (PSU) is faulty, the power

amplifiers of some TRXs are shut down to reduce the power demand of the BTS to ensure the

normal operation of the BTS.

Benefits

This feature ensures that the remaining PSUs are not overloaded and prevents the BTSs being

powered off when some PSUs are faulty. Therefore, the BTS can continue to work

uninterrupted.

This feature can reduce the battery consumption.

This feature can avoid the deterioration of the KPIs due to the sudden BTS power failure.

Description

When a BTS uses an AC power input, the PSU is needed for the AC/DC conversion. When

some PSUs are faulty, the output of the remaining PSUs cannot satisfy the power demand of

the BTS. In this case, the overcurrent protection mechanism of the PSU takes effect, which

leads to the BTS power failure.

In such a case, the BTS shuts down parts of the TRXs to reduce the power demand. To ensure

that the normal services are not affected, the BTS calculates the number of TRXs that need to

be shut down and then reports the number to the BSC. When the BSC receives the message

from the BTS, it stops allocating new calls to the TRXs to be shut down. When no service is

carried on the TRX to be shut down, the BTS shuts down the power amplifier of the TRX.

After the fault on the PSU is rectified, the BTS restarts the TRXs that are shut down.

Page 107: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 107 of 203

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.9.11 GBFD-511003 Call-Based Flow Control

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS13.0.

Summary

In case of emergencies or disasters, congestion occurs. When the traffic load is high, flow

control measures will be taken. This feature allows mobile originated calls (MOCs) and

mobile terminated calls (MTCs) to be subjected to different flow control policies.

Benefits

With this feature, telecom operators can ensure the success rate of MOCs or MTCs by using

different flow control policies in the case of emergencies or disasters.

Description

In case of emergencies or disasters, the traffic load may become very high as there will

usually be a large number of MOCs and MTCs. In such a case, flow control needs to be

performed to hold the system load to a proper level.

This feature identifies MOCs and MTCs by different flags and protects either MOCs or MTCs

from the effects of flow control. It also allows telecom operators to decide whether to discard

signaling of MOCs or MTCs using flow control.

The precedence of MOCs and MTCs in flow control is customer-definable.

Enhancement

None

Page 108: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 108 of 203

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

None

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.10 Basic features

1.10.1 GBFD-110901 Adjustment of Adaptive Timing Advance

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

The BTS informs the MS of the timing advance (TA) value by adopting adaptive rules so that

the communication between the BTS and the MS is synchronized.

Benefits

This feature is the basis for services between the MS and the BTS such as synchronization

and calls. The synchronization of the network can be achieved only after this feature is

enabled. Without this feature, all services cannot be properly processed.

Description

An interval of three timeslots exists between the TX signals and RX signals of the MS,

because the MS sends and receives signals with one frequency synthesizer.

After receiving the incoming signals, the MS transmits the outgoing signals at the time delay

of three timeslot plus TA value. Therefore, the TA value sent from the BTS to the MS is

essential. This ensures that the data from MSs at different distances from the BTS arrives at

the BTS in sequence, reducing the interference between signals. This in turn reduces the

interference in the entire network.

When the MS engaged in a call approaches the BTS or moves away from the BTS, the

information that is sent on a timeslot by the MS to the BTS overlaps with the information of

another call received on the next timeslot. In this case, interference is generated.

Therefore, when a call is ongoing, the BTS monitors the arrival of calls and sends commands

to the MS in the system information on the downlink SACCH. In the commands, the BTS informs the MS of the time to be advanced so that the data sent by the MS can arrive at the

Page 109: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 109 of 203

BTS timely. The time is referred to as TA. The TA value ranges from 0 μs to 233 μs (including

0 μs and 233 μs). The value affects the coverage range of the cell.

With this feature, the MS TA offset maintains an accuracy of +1/-1 symbol periods.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.10.2 GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement Report

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

The measurement result in the MR is an important reference for power control and handover

decision. The MR processing mainly involves decoding the MR to obtain the measurement

result.

Benefits

The MR includes information required by various BSS algorithms, such as the frequencies,

signal strength, and TA value. The MR is the precondition of power control and handover.

The network can provide high performance only when the MR is supported.

Description

The MR processing is used to report the measurement results and parameters to the BSC for

handover decision and power control. The MR is classified into uplink MR and downlink

MR.

Uplink MR

The uplink MR includes the measurement information on the uplink receive level and

receive quality measured on the TRX.

Downlink MR

Page 110: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 110 of 203

The downlink MR includes mainly the measurement information on downlink receive

level and downlink receive quality of the serving cell, and downlink receive level of the

neighboring cell measured by the MS. The downlink measurement result is reported to the BTS by the MS through the Measurement Report message.

The BTS periodically reports the measurement results of the uplink and downlink to the

BSC through the Measurement Report message. The interval of MR reporting is consistent with the SACCH multi-frame cycle.

In certain situations, the BTS cannot receive the downlink measurement result from the

MS. In such cases, the Measurement Report message includes only the uplink measurement result.

After receiving the MR, the BSC performs interpolation and filtering on the

measurement result in the uplink and downlink. Then, the BSC saves the results for power control and handover decision.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.10.3 GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Pre-processing of measurement report enables the BTS to perform part of the MR processing

work that the BSC is responsible for, such as interpolation and filtering performed for the

measurement result in the uplink and downlink. After processing, the BTS sends the

processed measurement result to the BSC. This reduces the processing load of the BSC.

Benefits

This feature reduces the signaling flow on the Abis interface and the possibility of

transmission congestion on the Abis interface.

Page 111: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 111 of 203

This feature helps reduce the CPU load of the board for signaling processing of the speech

services.

Description

This feature enables the BTS to perform part of the MR pre-processing work that BSC is

responsible for, such as interpolation and filtering. After being processed by the BTS, the

measurement result is reported to the BSC through the Pre-Processed Measurement Report

message.

This feature can be enabled or disabled through the configuration of related parameters. In

addition, the period to report the preprocessed MR is also configurable.

BTS preprocessing of the MR can reduce the signaling flow on the Abis interface and

improve the multiplexing efficiency of the signaling channel.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

This feature should be supported by the BTS.

1.10.4 GBFD-111101 System Information Sending

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Huawei GBSS supports the function of setting cell system information through the BSC and

periodical sending the system information by the BTS. On receiving the system information,

the MS adjusts its settings based on the content in the system information.

Benefits

The system information is a key index used by operators to adjust the network and control the

behavior of the MS. The system information also plays an important role in network

optimization.

Proper system information mechanism is essential to a network of high quality.

Page 112: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 112 of 203

Better understanding of the system information helps improve the network structure and

build high quality network.

Description

System information contains the primary radio network parameters on the Um interface. The

parameters are as follows: network identification parameters, cell selection parameters,

system control parameters, and network function parameters. Through receiving system

information, the MS can access the network and use various services provided by the

network.

Huawei BSS supports 13 system information types: 1, 2, 2bis, 2ter, 2quater, 3, 4, 5, 5bis, 5ter,

6, 7, and 13. Among them, types 1, 2, 2bis, 2ter, 2quater, 3, 4, 7, and 13 are broadcast

messages transmitted on the BCCH in idle mode. Types 5, 5bis, 5ter, and 6 are associated

messages transmitted on the SACCH in connected mode.

Among the 13 system information types, 1, 2, 2bis, 2ter, 3, 4, 5, 5bis, 5ter, and 6 are basic

system information messages. Types 7 and 13 are system information transmitted to support

the GPRS. Type 2quater is the system information transmitted to support the inter-RAT

handover and inter-RAT reselection.

System information messages are sent in two different ways: broadcast message and

associated message.

When the MS is in idle mode, it communicates with the network through the broadcast system

information. Through the broadcast system information received from the network, the MS

learns its current location and the available service types. Some parameters in the system

information can also help control the cell reselection of the MS.

When the MS is engaged in a call, it communicates with the network through the associated

system information. The network uses certain content in the associated system information to

control the transmission, power, and handover of the MS.

The broadcast system information is closely related to the channel-associated message. The

content in the broadcast system information can overlap with that in the associated message.

The content in the associated message might be inconsistent with that in the broadcast system

information, because the associated message affects only one MS, while the broadcast system

information affects all MSs in idle mode.

System information contains the following key parameters of the network:

Network identity parameter

ATT (IMSI attach-detach allowed)

CCCH CONF (common control channel configuration)

BS AG BLKS RES (number of blocks reserved for access granted)

BS PA MFRMS (paging channel multi-frames)

T3212 (Periodical location updating timer)

Cell Channel Description

Neighbor Cells Description

MBR (Multiband Report)

CELL_BAR_ACCESS

This parameter indicates whether a cell allows the access of an MS. It is a one-bit code:

Value 0 indicates that the access is allowed, and value 1 indicates that the access is not

Page 113: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 113 of 203

allowed. This parameter does not influence the access of MSs that are handed over to the

cell.

PI (cell re-selection parameter indicator)

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.10.5 GBFD-111102 Forced System Information Sending by OMC

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Huawei BSS supports the function that the system information can be sent forcibly to a

certain cell through the BSC and the system information of certain cells is updated forcibly.

Benefits

The system information is a key index used by operators to adjust the network and control the

behavior of the MS. The system information also plays an important role in network

optimization. With this feature, the network quality can be further improved as follows:

Proper system information mechanism is essential to a quality network. This feature

enables the network optimization personnel to adjust the parameters and verify the

adjustment for specific cells in real time, facilitating the network optimization.

When problems occur in the network, this feature helps assist the maintenance personnel in troubleshooting.

This feature enables the operators to improve the network quality, provide better services to

MSs, and improve the user satisfaction.

Description

Through the LMT, the system information of a cell can be forcibly updated and sent. During

the network optimization, the system information on the Abis interface can be traced for

Page 114: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 114 of 203

checking certain system information configuration. The parameter configuration of system

information can be obtained immediately by using the function of sending system information

forcibly.

This feature helps network optimization personnel and maintenance personnel to verify

network parameters after parameter adjustment.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.10.6 GBFD-111901 Supporting Three-Digit MNC

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

This feature supports both 3-digit and 2-digit MNCs.

Benefits

This feature meets the networking requirements of operators whose MNC is 3 digits.

Description

MNC can be configured as 3 digits or 2 digits according to the network planning.

For the countries and areas with multiple mobile networks, 2-digit MNC cannot specify all the

networks. In this case, 3-digit MNC can be adopted. The number of networks specified by the

MNC is increased from 100 to 1000.

Enhancement

None

Page 115: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 115 of 203

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.10.7 GBFD-116101 Support of Daylight Saving Time

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0.

Summary

The BSS supports the daylight saving time (DST), which can be configured and queried to

meet the requirements of the countries where the daylight saving time is applied.

Benefits

In normal cases, the DST is one hour earlier than the standard time. With this feature, the

system time can be automatically changed without manual intervention according to the

specified rules.

Description

Huawei BSS can set and query the time zone and DST change rules on the M2000 or LMT.

With the DST change rules, you can select the date configuration, week configuration, or

hybrid configuration. Date configuration indicates the DST starts from or ends on a certain

date in a certain month. Week configuration indicates that the DST starts from or ends on a

certain day of a certain week in a certain month. Hybrid configuration indicates that the DST

starts from or ends on a certain day after a certain date in a certain month.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

Page 116: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 116 of 203

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.10.8 GBFD-113001 SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

This feature can dynamically adjust the number of SDCCHs according to the load of the

TCHs and SDCCHs. In this way, the effect of the initial configuration of the SDCCH on the

system is minimized and radio resources are fully utilized.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

Optimizes the usage of the TCHs and SDCCHs, and reduces the occurrence of SDCCH congestion.

Minimizes the impact of the initial configuration of the SDCCH on the system, reduces

the requirements on the accuracy of the estimation of the SDCCH, and reduces the workload for changing the configuration.

Reduces the call access failure caused by the congestion of the SDCCH, improves the

call access rate, and increases the operator revenue.

Description

In normal cases, the demands on the SDCCH are calculated on the basis of the traffic model.

That is, current traffic distribution and related statistics. The increase of the SMS service,

however, leads to the more demands on the SDCCH. Therefore, the prediction on the

demanded SDCCHs becomes very complex.

If the number of MSs in a cell increases sharply in a short time, many MSs fail to access the

network due to no available SDCCH. In this case, the SDCCH dynamic adjustment feature

can convert the TCH into the SDCCH dynamically to enable more MSs to access the network.

The dynamic adjustment of SDCCH takes cell as unit. If the SDCCH dynamic adjustment is

allowed, the system automatically converts the TCH into the SDCCH, provided that the

following conditions are met:

The number of idle SDCCHs is lower than or equal to the threshold of the idle SDCCH.

The number of SDCCHs in a cell is lower than or equal to the maximum number of

SDCCHs in a cell.

The number of idle TCHs in a cell is higher than 4 or higher than the number of TRXs

configured in a cell. At the same time, the BSC sends the configuration command to the BTS to convert the TCH into the SDCCH, and updates the channel table of the BSC.

Page 117: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 117 of 203

When the number of SDCCHs is higher than the defined threshold after the TCH Minimum

Recovery Time, the SDCCHs are converted into the TCHs.

Forced restoration of SDCCH: If you disable the SDCCH/TCH dynamical adjustment feature,

all the SDCCHs converted from TCH are restored to their original form (TCH).

This feature can reduce the requirement on the accuracy of the estimation of the demand on

SDCCH, and reduce the workload for changing the configuration. In addition, it can increase

the system capacity and the call access rate.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.10.9 GBFD-112401 Cell Frequency Scan

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

With this feature, you can test the uplink interference on the basis of the traffic measurement

without the test device.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

The maintenance personnel can test the uplink interference without the test device. In

this way, the accuracy of the frequency configuration is improved and an overview of the uplink interference is provided.

Operators can evaluate the electromagnetic environment without the addition of new devices, which is an observation method of network planning and optimization.

This feature improves the maintenance efficiency and reduces the O&M cost for

operators.

Page 118: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 118 of 203

Description

This feature uses the idle TCH to test uplink receive level of all the frequencies of the

specified frequency band. Engineers can use the result to select a proper operating frequency.

This feature is introduced to Huawei products for testing the interference. Because this feature

scans the uplink level, the result indicates the signal strength of the frequency in the cell.

Engineers can use the result to select a proper operating frequency.

The GBSS implements the cell frequency scanning on the basis of the traffic measurement

result. Under the condition that the call is not affected, the feature uses an idle frame in a TCH

in the cell (the TCH in the BCCH TRX is assigned preferably) to periodically scan the uplink

receive level of specified frequencies. It takes about one minute to scan 50 frequencies. A

frequency scan task can register up to 124 frequencies. It takes about three minutes to traverse

all the frequencies.

The result of the frequency scanning is the average value of the uplink receive levels scanned

from the beginning of the scan task to the end of the scan task. The uplink frequency scan

feature is to test the interference level that affects the uplink receive quality in the radio

environment. It can measure the uplink interference of a specific frequency.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.10.10 GBFD-111806 STP (Signaling Transport Point)

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

This feature supports the signaling transfer function based on the SCCP/M3UA, which

supports a maximum of 32 signaling transfer points (STP).

Page 119: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 119 of 203

Benefits

With the development of mobile communications, the networking modes of the core network,

transport network, and access network are more flexible. Huawei GBSS supports this feature

to meet the requirements of the operators in terms of the networking mode. Through this

feature, more flexible networking mode can be supported. This feature provides the following

benefits:

Implements the transfer between the CN and the BSC signaling through the MGW, separating the signaling plane from the user plane.

Implements different levels of the transmission security, ensuring the security of the core service in an efficient way and reducing the transmission cost.

Description

Huawei GBSS supports the signaling transfer function on the A interface based on the

SCCP/M3UA. Through this feature, the BSC can be connected to the MGW through the

signaling transfer mode, providing more transmission networking modes.

Currently, the GBSS supports a maximum of 32 STPs.

In the case of 24-digit signaling point, the value of STP code ranges from 0x1 to 0xFFFFF1.

In the case of 14-digit signaling point, the value of STP code ranges from 0x1 to 0x03FF1.

The STP codes should be different from the codes of the existing OSP, STP, or DSP.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

This feature should be supported by the CN.

1.10.11 GBFD-111802 14-Digit Signaling Point Code

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Page 120: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 120 of 203

Summary

Huawei GBSS supports the connection of the SS7 signaling system and the MSC. The SS7

signaling system adopts 14-digit signaling point code. The signaling point code includes three

parts: macro cell code, zone code, and signaling point code.

Benefits

The signaling point code has different code modes based on different countries and areas.

Generally, it is classified into two types: 14-digit (international) and 24-digit (national)

signaling code modes. Huawei GBSS supports both code modes. This feature provides the

following benefits:

This feature conforms to the requirements of different signaling systems, facilitating the use of networking in different countries and areas.

The equipment transferred to the area using different code modes can still be used.

Description

This feature supports 14-digit international signaling point.

The code capacity of 14-digit signaling point code is 16,384 codes. 14-digit signaling point

code is classified into three parts: macro cell code, zone code, and signaling point code.

24-digit signaling point code is applied in China since 1990. It is also called uniform code or

one-layer code. This code specifies that all the signaling points of the SS7 signaling network

in China must use 24-digit signaling point code. According to the actual situation, 24-digit

signaling point code is classified into three signaling zones in terms of the structure. That is,

eight digits for codes of main signaling zone, eight digits for codes of sub-signaling zone, and

eight digits for signaling point codes.

In the signaling network, a signaling point communicates with other signaling points through

the signaling point code. The signaling point code identifies the signaling points that can

communicate with the signaling points in a signaling network.

To facilitate the management of the signaling network, the CCITT specifies in Rec. Q705 that

the international signaling network and other national signaling networks should be

independently deployed. Therefore, the signaling point codes are also independent. In Rec.

Q708, the plan of the international signaling point code is specified. In addition, the national

signaling point codes can be determined by the administrative department according to the

actual situations of each country.

Each country can adopt 14-digit signaling point code or 24-digit signaling point code as

required.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

Page 121: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 121 of 203

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

This feature should be supported by the CN.

1.10.12 MRFD-210801 Interface Message Tracing

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary

This feature is used for interface message tracing in online/offline mode, tracing result review,

and routine equipment management.

Benefits

This feature simplifies the process of monitoring the signaling over the radio transmission

interfaces and facilitates network optimization and fault rectification.

Description

This feature is used for interface message tracing in online/offline mode and routine

equipment management.

With this feature, the GBSS/RAN can trace messages in real time, stop updating, save the

tracing messages, review the tracing result, and check the time when the message is sent. In

this way, the maintenance personnel can accurately locate and solve problems. In addition, all

the interfaces have the condition filtering function. Therefore, the maintenance personnel can

reduce the number of traced messages through condition filtering, improving the tracing

accuracy. Subscriber information such as IMSI, IMEI, IMEISV, MSISDN, and IP address in

traced messages is anonymized before being provided.

In the case of the GBSS system:

The BSSAP, MTP2, MTP3, and SCCP messages can be traced over the A interface as required.

The BSSAP messages can be filtered according to the message types such as the BSSMAP,

paging messages, and DTAP messages. You can also select the traced messages according to

the cell.

The RSL, OML, and LAPD messages can be traced over the Abis interface. The LAPD

messages can be filtered according to the site and TRX number. The RSL messages can be

filtered according to the message type, such as the measurement report, paging, and channel

request. The OML messages can also be filtered according to the message type.

The application layer messages and the LAPD messages can be traced over the Pb interface.

The LAPD message can be selected and traced according to the timeslot number. The

application layer messages can be traced according to the site number and the message types

such as paging.

In the case of the RAN system:

Page 122: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 122 of 203

The operator can verify the configuration data, locate and solve problems by tracing the

messages over the Iu, Iub, Iur, and Uu interfaces. After the configuration data is set, the

operator can determine the correctness of the signaling links by tracing and interpreting the

messages over the Iu, Iub, Iur, and Uu interfaces. The operators can also locate exceptions

when exceptions occur.

Therefore, tracing and interpreting the messages over the Iu, Iub, Iur, and Uu interfaces can

take the place of the signal analyzer to perform the interoperability test between the RNC and

other network elements.

All the interfaces can filter the messages according to the message layer or the logical object.

In this way, the number of traced maintenance signaling can be greatly reduced. Therefore,

the tracing accuracy is improved and the problem location speed is accelerated.

Operators can also use this feature to optimize the network.

Enhancement

UMTS

None

GSM

The GBSS8.0 supports the tracing over the Gb interface and the packet message tracing over

the Um interface.

GBSS8.1 supports the tracing of the VGCS/VBS messages

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.10.13 MRFD-210802 User Signaling Tracing

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary

With this feature, the signaling of an MS can be traced on the GBSS/RAN side. In a tracing

window, all the signaling of an MS in the GBSS/RAN can be traced. In addition, you can

manage the tracing task, save the messages, and review the tracing result.

Page 123: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 123 of 203

Benefits

This feature facilitates the monitoring of specified MS's signaling and facilitates network

optimization and fault rectification.

Description

This feature allows users to type characteristic words of called MSs (including the IMSI,

TMSI, MSISDN, and IMEI) on the LMT or M2000 to trace the signaling of calling MSs. If

the ID anonymization function is enabled, users need to type the anonymized IMSI, MSISDN,

and IMEI. The host decodes the signaling of each call. If the MS information in the signaling

matches the characteristic words of the MS to be traced, the host returns the signaling of this

call to the OMC for display. With this feature, MSs' signaling over all interfaces can be traced,

saved, and viewed. This prevents a large number of signaling messages from being traced

over each interface. Therefore, the troubleshooting efficiency improves, facilitating problem

location.

Subscriber information such as IMSI, IMEI, IMEISV, MSISDN, and IP address in traced

messages is anonymized before being provided.

This feature supports signaling tracing for specified MSs. Based on the traced signaling

messages for specified MSs, operators can learn about the network status and optimize their

networks accordingly.

Enhancement

UMTS

None

GSM

GBSS8.1 supports the PS single user tracing and VGCS/VBS message tracing.

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.10.14 GBFD-112203 Cell Tracing

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Page 124: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 124 of 203

Summary

With this feature, you can trace all the signaling of multiple calls in a cell. In this way, the

maintenance personnel can locate the problem in an efficient way.

Benefits

When you handle the voice problems, especially the problems related to the signaling

procedure and performance, you need to analyze the signaling on the A or Abis interface. The

common methods are drive test (DT) or dialing test. Together with the traced data obtained by

the signaling unit, the signaling can be analyzed. This process, however, is very complex and

expensive.

The cell tracing log facilitates to locate the network problem. You can directly trace calls in

the existing network and save the cost of the DT and dialing test for locating the problem.

Description

You can issue the cell tracing command on the M2000 to trace the calls of a specific cell. A

maximum of 16 calls in the specific cell can be traced at a time. The cell tracing feature

applies the first-in first-tracing principle. After a tracing task is started, the first accessed 16

calls in the traced cell are traced. If a call is complete, a newly accessed call is traced.

Subscriber information such as IMSI, IMEI, IMEISV, MSISDN, and IP address in traced

messages is anonymized before being provided. You can choose the cells to be traced on the

basis of the CELLID. The GBSC enables users to save and review the tracing log. You can

also choose to trace only the signaling on the A or Abis interface. When the message on the

Abis interface is traced, you can determine whether to trace the MR.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

The M2000 must support this feature.

1.10.15 GBFD-111301 LAPD Multiplexing at Abis Interface

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Page 125: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 125 of 203

Summary

Each BTS has an operation and maintenance link (OML) that works at the rate of 64 kbit/s.

Each TRX has a radio signaling link (RSL) that works at the rate of 64 kbit/s. This feature

allows multiple RSLs and OMLs to be multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s timeslot on the Abis

link in TDM transmission mode.

Benefits

Except for the timeslot 0 used for synchronization, there are 31 timeslots on one E1 link are

used for the signaling and service transmission. If the signaling compression technology is not

used, one E1 link can only carry the data and signaling of only 10 TRXs. In some areas where

the transmission resources are limited or expensive, saving transmission bandwidth is a major

concern of operators. This feature allows a maximum of 15 TRXs to be carried on one E1

link.

With the rapid development of data services, the transmission resources on the Abis interface

become more and more limited. For example, an EGPRS service with the MCS9 coding

scheme occupies four 64 kbit/s channels, and EDGE Evolution requires a higher bandwidth. If

the signaling and services are not compressed, the new services developed by operators will

consume a huge amount of transmission resources. This feature multiplexes the bandwidth

onto the signaling links and saves the transmission resources on the Abis interface.

Description

In Huawei BSC, the interface board connected to the BTS supports two multiplexing modes:

16 kbit/s sub-timeslot exchange and N:1 multiplexing. These two modes are targeted at the

RSL or OML signaling channels. The TCH adopts the exclusive mode. The full-rate speech

channel is 16 kbit/s and the half-rate speech channel is 8 kbit/s.

If full-rate channels are configured in the TRX, the BSS allows the signaling of four RSLs to

be multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s timeslot on the E1 link. Then, the calls of multiple TRXs

can be carried on one E1 link, saving the transmission resources on the Abis interface. If 4:1

multiplexing mode is applied, Huawei BSS allows a maximum of 15 TRXs to be carried on

one E1 link.

If half-rate channels are configured in the TRX, the N:1 multiplexing mode is applied to the

Abis interface, where N can be 2, 3, or 4. The capacity of the speech channel doubles.

Therefore, the signaling volume on the RSL of each TRX is doubles. Therefore, the 2:1

multiplexing mode is used by default. That is, the RSLs of a maximum of two TRXs can be

multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s timeslot on the E1 link. The multiplexing ratio is closely

related to the total number of TRXs that one E1 supports. Because the traffic volume on the

signaling channel in half-rate configuration mode is heavy, the recommended value of N is 2,

that is, 2:1 is the recommended multiplexing ratio. In this case, one E1 link supports a

maximum of 13 TRXs in half-rate configuration.

If the BTSs are cascaded, they can have different multiplexing ratios. For example, three

BTSs are cascaded in S1/1/1 cell configuration. Then, the multiplexing ratio of the level 1,

level 2, and level 3 BTSs can be set to 4:1, 2:1, and 4:1 respectively.

Enhancement

GBSS7.0

Page 126: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 126 of 203

When GBFD-117301 Flex Abis is enabled, N in the N:1 multiplexing mode can be set to 5 or

6 for a higher multiplexing ratio. For details, refer to the description of GBFD-7301 Flex

Abis.

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.10.16 GBFD-114802 Discontinuous Reception (DRX)

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Discontinuous Reception (DRX) means that the MS monitors the messages in the specified

timeslots according to the parameters configured in the system. This reduces the power

consumption of the MS and prolongs the standby time of the MS.

Benefits

This feature greatly reduces the power consumption of the MS and prolongs the standby time

of the MS.

Description

If the MS in idle mode selects a cell as its serving cell, it can listen to the paging message in

the cell. The DRX is introduced to reduce the power consumption of the MS. That is, each

MS (corresponding to an IMSI) corresponds to a dedicated paging group. Each paging group

corresponds to a paging sub-channel of the cell.

The MS can calculate its paging group according to the last three digits of the IMSI and the

configuration of the paging channels of the serving cell, and therefore calculates the location

of the paging sub-channel of this paging group.

In idle mode, the MSs of a paging group listen to the paging messages only on the fixed

paging sub-channel (during this period, it can also monitor the receive level of the BCCH

TRX of the non-serving cell) and ignore the paging messages on other paging sub-channels or

even shut down some hardware devices. This can reduce the power consumption of the MS,

provided that the necessary network message measurement task is implemented within a

certain period.

Page 127: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 127 of 203

The number of paging sub-channels of each cell can be calculated according to the CCCH

type, BS AG BLKS RES (in 51 multi-frames, some data blocks are used for the AGCH block),

and BS PA MFRMS (the number of 51 multi-frames used for a paging on the paging

sub-channel).

In the GSM system, the CCCH is classified into the AGCH and the PCH. The main function

of the CCCH is to send immediate assignment messages and paging messages. The CCCH

can be borne by a physical channel or multiple physical channels. The CCCH can share a

physical channel with the SDCCH. The combination of the CCCH in the cell is determined by

the parameter CCCH CONF. The settings of CCCH CONF must be consistent with the actual

configurations. When the cell has only one TRX, it is recommended that the CCCH shares a

physical channel with the SDCCH (meanwhile, there are three CCCH message blocks).

In some cases, the paging traffic in an LA is excessively high, and one physical channel is

insufficient for sending paging messages. Therefore, the GSM specifications specify that the

BCCH TRX can be configured with multiple CCCHs, but the CCCHs can only be configured

on timeslots 0, 2, 4, and 6.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

This feature should be supported by the MS

1.10.17 GBFD-111601 BTS Power Management

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

BTS power management supports hierarchical power-off and voltage abnormal protection.

Benefits

This feature enhances power management and self-protection of the BTS, improving the

reliability of the system, prolonging the lifespan of products and serving time of the system.

With this feature, both the BTS stability and the QoS are improved. In addition, the O&M cost for the BTS is reduced, increasing the revenues of operators.

Page 128: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 128 of 203

Description

Huawei BTS can flexibly deal with the system load according to the actual situations,

prolonging the serving time of the system.

When there is no mains supply, the BTS hierarchical power-off function reduces the power

consumption and raises the duration of the storage battery. On one hand, when the mains

supply is not available, all the TCH TRXs are shut down except the BCCH TRX. This is

called soft shutdown. On the other hand, when the capacity of the storage batteries drops to

the preset value, all the TRXs are powered off automatically to protect the storage batteries.

This is called hard shutdown. The use of the automatic power-off mode is configurable.

This feature mainly applies to the BTSs in cascading connection. When the mains power of

the upper-level BTS is powered off and the mains power of the lower-level BTS is normal,

this feature can prolong the working time of the transmission module of the upper-level BTS

to reduce the impact on the lower-level BTS.

When the working temperature is high or the temperature regulation unit does not work

properly, the TMU shuts down the power amplification of some TRXs if the temperature

exceeds the threshold in the cabinet. This prevents any negative impact on the system. If the

TRX is faulty or the VSWR exceeds the limit, to minimize the chance of total damage, the

TRX is allowed to quit the services and shut down the power, including the power of the

power amplifier. Whether this function is to be enabled and the parameters to be used can be

set. Therefore, the flexibility of the system is improved.

In this way, the power management and self-protection for the BTS are enhanced. Therefore,

the reliability of the system is improved and the lifespan of the products is prolonged.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.10.18 GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Page 129: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 129 of 203

Summary

Huawei enhanced power control algorithm is designed on the basis of Huawei network

optimization experiences. The enhanced power control algorithm has the following

characteristics: MR compensation, prediction filtering, dual-threshold power control

algorithm, variable step power control, adaptive power control, bad quality signal strength

upper threshold adjustment, and separate configuration for the uplink and downlink power

control steps. With all these characteristics, this feature improves the accuracy of the power

control and also ensures the stability and efficiency of the algorithm.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

Improves the effectiveness and accuracy of the power control.

Reduces the interference in the network.

Reduces the power consumption of the MS and BTS.

Increases the effective capacity of the network.

Improves the network operation quality.

Description

Power control is an important method for radio link control. The system decides whether the

transmit power of the MS and the BTS should be adjusted, based on the expected values of

the system parameters and MRs concerning uplink/downlink receive level and signal quality

received from the BTS. Power control on the radio link is aimed at reducing the transmit

power without sacrificing the transmit quality. In this way, power control is implemented

while the quality of the radio links is maintained. When the transmit power levels of the MS

or BTS are minimized, interference to other channels is reduced.

Power control procedure

The power control procedure involves MR preprocessing, power control decision, and power control implementation.

Key technologies

− MR compensation: The level in the MR is compensated to a level corresponding to

the current transmit power. In power control decision, the power control module

extracts several receive level values and receive quality values from history MRs.

These MRs may be obtained under different transmit power. Therefore, in order to

ensure the accuracy of the receive level, the receive level values from the history

MRs must be compensated if the transmit power in these MRs changes. Filter these

MRs after interpolation and compensation so that the power control decision is more effective.

Prediction filtering: An interval exists between power control decision and power

adjustment. Therefore, the MR on which the power control decision is based does not

accurately reflect the radio environment when power adjustment occurs, but misses

the latest changes of receive level and receive quality. Therefore, there is a delay for power adjustment.

Prediction filtering enables the MR on which the power control decision is based to

accurately reflect the radio environment when power adjustment occurs. Therefore,

the delay for power adjustment can be minimized. The principle of prediction

filtering is that the variation of receive level and receive quality maintains continuity

Page 130: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 130 of 203

in a short period of time. Sample the preceding N MRs, and perform weighted

filtering, and then predict the subsequent zero to three MRs.

Generally, the interval between power control decision and power adjustment is 3

MRs (about 1.5s). Therefore, prediction filtering can ensure the accuracy of

prediction. Power control decision is implemented by filtering the predicted MRs

along with the interpolated MRs and compensated history MRs.

− Dual-threshold power control algorithm: The receive level can be within the scope of

the dual-threshold. The effect of both level and quality on power control is considered. This improves the system flexibility and prevents the oscillation.

− Variable step power control: This technology helps achieve quick and accurate power

adjustment. When the level or the quality is far from the expected value, large step of

the power is adopted for power adjustment. When the level or the quality is close to the expected value, small step of the power is adopted for power adjustment.

− Adaptive power control: This technology changes the power control strategy based

on the communication environment, making the power control effective and stable.

This is reflected in the following aspects: automatically changing the maximum

variable step of the power control based on the communication environment and

adopting corresponding power control strategy based on the communication

environment.

− Bad quality signal strength upper threshold adjustment: When the receive quality is

good, decrease the value of upper threshold of the uplink (downlink) level to reduce

the transmit power of the MS (BTS). When the receive quality is poor, increase the value of upper threshold of the uplink (downlink) level to improve the voice quality.

− Separate configuration for the uplink and downlink power control steps: This method

facilitates the flexible and rapid power control based on the actual situation of the

network. When the uplink (downlink) signal quality or the receive quality degrades abruptly, the power can be adjusted upward quickly to prevent call drop.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

Page 131: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 131 of 203

1.10.19 GBFD-113525 DTMF Downlink Message Filter

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS12.0.

Summary

This feature checks and completely deletes the DL DTMF messages on the user plane and

control plane of the Abis interface.

Benefits

This feature deletes the DL DTMF messages to ensure operator controlling the network.

Description

This feature shields the DL DTMF messages on the user plane and control plane of the Abis

interface. In this case, after the call is set up, the called cell phone will not receive DTMF

signals. By shielding DL DTMF signals, this feature enhances the GBSS network security.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature is mutually exclusive with the following features:

GBFD-118602 A over IP

GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.10.20 GBFD-115201 High Speed Signaling

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Page 132: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 132 of 203

Summary

With this feature, N timeslots in an E1 are bound for the physical transmission of the SS7

signaling. A maximum of 2 Mbit/s E1 bandwidth (N = 31) can be used.

Benefits

This feature breaks the capacity limitation of a single signaling point using the narrowband

signaling. In addition, this feature saves the signaling point resources and reduces the

networking complexity while meeting the signaling bandwidth requirements of the high

processing capacity of the BSC.

Description

With network expansion, development of new services, popularization of the short message

service and wireless intelligent network service, and increase in the traffic volume, the

signaling flow between different signaling points increases rapidly. According to the protocols

related to the SS7 signaling, a maximum of 16 signaling links are allowed between single

signaling points. If the 64 kbit/s signaling link is used, a maximum of 1 Mbit/s bandwidth can

be provided for a single signaling point in the entire system. This is far from the requirements

for the signaling link bandwidth when the BSC is in full configuration.

With this feature, N timeslots in an E1 are bound for the physical transmission of the SS7

signaling. Therefore, the bandwidth of a signaling link is extended to N x 64 kit/s and a

maximum of 2 Mbit/s E1 bandwidth (N = 31) can be used. The high-speed signaling has the

following characteristics:

Large capacity

This feature breaks the capacity limitation of a single signaling point using the narrowband

signaling, saves the signaling point resources, and reduces the networking complexity while

meeting the signaling bandwidth requirements of the high processing capacity of the BSC.

Flexible bandwidth configuration

The bandwidth of the high-speed signaling link is N x 64 kbit/s, where N ranges from 1 to 31.

This enables the operator to flexibly configure the physical bandwidth according to the traffic

volume of the BSC, reducing the transmission cost.

Low delay

The high-speed signaling link uses bound timeslots to carry the signaling data. This

effectively reduces the transmission delay over the A interface when the traffic volume is low,

reducing the call establishment duration to some extent.

This feature is used together with the Local Multiple Signaling Points feature to support more

flexible signaling networking mode.

Enhancement

GBSS7.0

This application enhancement supports the use of high-speed signaling in the MSC pool.

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

Page 133: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 133 of 203

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

The CN must support this feature.

1.10.21 GBFD-110521 Guaranteed Emergency Call

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Summary

In the cells with heavy traffic, the emergency call procedure is enhanced to improve the

success rate of emergency call establishment.

Benefits

The success rate of emergency call establishment is guaranteed when the traffic in the

network is heavy.

Description

In most networks, the emergency call services specified by GSM specifications are mandatory.

Compared with a common call, an emergency call has a higher priority and faster access

capability. Therefore, the access rate and success rate of call establishment of the emergency

call is guaranteed. However, in emergency situations such as an earthquake, tsunami, or flood,

the traffic in the network is heavy. Hence, the emergency call service may not be implemented

due to the lack of resources.

To avoid this circumstance, in the cells with heavy traffic, the emergency call procedure is

enhanced to improve the success rate of emergency call establishment.

To ensure that the TCH can be assigned to the MS that initiates an emergency call, the TCH is

preferentially assigned in the immediate assignment and the channel mode is modified during

service assignment. If no TCH is available in the immediate assignment, an SDCCH is

assigned to the emergency call and the channel preemption is performed. If the channel is

successfully preempted, the channel is reserved for the emergency call and then assigned to

the emergency call during service assignment. Therefore, even if the traffic is heavy in the

network, the success rate of emergency call establishment can be maximized.

Enhancement

None

Page 134: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 134 of 203

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

The eMLPP function must be enabled on the MSC.

1.10.22 GBFD-511001 License Control for Urgency

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS9.0 and RAN11.1.

Summary

With this feature, the license limitation is withdrawn in emergencies so that the operator can

handle the sudden increase in network capacity.

Benefits

With this feature, the operator can temporarily withdraw the license limitation in the case of a

sudden increase in traffic volume due to natural disasters or holidays. Therefore, the

equipment can be used effectively to optimum capacity.

Description

The license limitation is withdrawn through manual execution of the MML commands on the

LMT or M2000. Therefore, the equipment can be used effectively to optimum capacity.

For each R version, the operation personnel have three chances to withdraw the license

limitation through the MML commands. The operation takes effect immediately after the

commands are executed. The validity period is seven days. After the three chances are used up,

a new chance can be obtained only through the software upgrade.

In the case of the WCDMA network, this feature withdraws the license limitation of the RAN

because the NodeB has its own license files. In the case of the GSM, this feature withdraws

the license limitation of the BSC and BTS because the license of the BTS is sent by the BSC.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

Page 135: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 135 of 203

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.10.23 GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0.

Summary

This feature enhances and optimizes the GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm

feature in terms of the filtering algorithm, interpolation of the measurement report, power

control decision algorithm, and flexibility of threshold configuration.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

Improves the efficiency and accuracy of power control.

Reduces the intra-network interference and the power consumption of the MS and BTS.

Increases the network capacity.

Improves the network performance.

Description

Power control is an important method for radio link control. Based on the expected values set

for parameters and the MRs on the uplink/downlink receive level and receive quality sent by

the BTS, the BSC determines whether to adjust the transmit power of the MS and the BTS.

Power control on the radio link is aimed at reducing the transmit power while maintaining the

transmission quality.

The HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm feature enhances and optimizes the

GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm feature in terms of the filtering algorithm,

interpolation of the measurement report, power control decision algorithm, and flexibility of

threshold configuration.

Optimizing the filtering/interpolation of the MR

With this feature introduced, the incorrect MRs obtained at the initial stage of channel

access do not affect the power control algorithm and therefore the change in trend of the

transmit power of the MS can be predicted based on the MRs in a more timely and

correct manner.

Optimizing the decision algorithm

Page 136: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 136 of 203

Based on the filtered receive level and receive quality, this algorithm considers the gain

of the radio channel from frequency hopping, improving the accuracy of decisions.

Setting the power control threshold according to the service type

This algorithm sets different power control thresholds for AMRFR services, AMRHR services, FR services, and HR services to optimize the power control on the AMR.

Enhancement

GBSS8.1

Support implementing with "GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report."

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

It is recommended that this feature work with the following features:

GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.11 Interface Features

1.11.1 GBFD-111801 Ater Interface 4:1 Multiplexing

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Huawei GBSC supports 4:1 multiplexing on the Ater interface. The previous PCM frame of

64 kbit/s can be converted into the TRAU frame of 16 kbit/s to save the transmission

bandwidth.

Benefits

During network deployment, the transmission cost takes up much of the investment.

Assuming that the network quality is ensured, this feature can reduce the transmission

bandwidth in the following ways:

Page 137: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 137 of 203

Through the configuration of the TC subrack on the MSC side (BM/TC separated mode),

the compression multiplexing is implemented to save the transmission bandwidth and to reduce the transmission cost.

Operators can use the same amount of transmission investment to build a more reliable network.

Description

Huawei GBSC supports 4:1 multiplexing on the Ater interface. That is, the four timeslots on

the E1 of the A interface can be multiplexed onto a timeslot on the Ater interface through the

Ater interface processing board.

In the telephone exchange network, the voice coding scheme is Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)

and the rate is 64 kbit/s. To save the radio channel resources, the GSM system adopts the

voice coding scheme RPE-LTP or CELP and the rate is 13 kbit/s (16 kbit/s for transmission).

If the PSTN subscriber calls the GSM mobile subscriber, the voice codec is converted from 13

kbit/s codec to 64 kbit/s codec. The voice codec conversion is implemented in the TC (TRAU)

unit. Before conversion, the voice signals are exchanged and transmitted on the channels of

16 kbit/s in the BSC.

The Ater interface is an internal interface between the TC processing unit and the service

processing module. On the Ater interface, Huawei GBSC supports the multiplexing of four

voice channels to an E1 timeslot of 64 kbit/s. When the TC subrack is configured on the MSC

side, the remote transmission resource can be saved by 75%.

Huawei GBSC supports the configuration of the TC subrack on the BSC side or on the MSC

side to provide the flexible networking for operators.

Enhancement

GBSS7.0

Resource pool of the Ater interface: GBSS7.0 introduces the concept of the resource pool of

the Ater interface. The links on the Ater interface used as a resource pool can be inconsistent

with the CICs on the A interface.

This feature supports the Ater timeslot of 8 kbit/s (require the support from GBFD-6901 Flex

Ater): the timeslots on the Ater interface involves the timeslots of 16 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s. When

a call connection is established, according to the service type, the Ater timeslots of 16 kbit/s

are allocated if the TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface; the Ater timeslots of 8 kbit/s are

allocated if the TCHHs are allocated on the Um interface. In this way, the resources on the

Ater interface can be fully used and the resources can be saved by over 75%.

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Page 138: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 138 of 203

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.11.2 GBFD-119001 Gb Interface Function

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

This feature supports the processing of PS services in the BSC, that is, the built-in PCU

function.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

The Gb interface is introduced to Huawei GBSS, which can support the processing of PS

services, that is, the built-in PCU function. The external PCU is not required. In this way,

the network elements are greatly integrated, the occupied space is smaller, and the energy consumption is lower.

The processing specifications of the built-in PCU are greater than the processing

specifications of the external PCU. This helps operators to process PS services in an efficient way.

The LMT is shared by the built-in PCU and the BSC. This reduces the O&M cost of operators.

Description

For GBSS8.0 and later versions, PS services can be processed directly in the BSC, that is, the

built-in PCU function.

As a basic feature, the Gb interface is introduced to support uplink and downlink NS SDU

transmission specified in the GSM specifications, load sharing, LLC PDU transmission,

packet paging, radio access capability indication, radio access capability update, radio status

indication, GPRS service suspension, recovery, Flush LL, flow control, and BSSGP Virtual

Connection (BVC) blocking or reset.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

In the case of the built-in PCU, the Gb interface board and the DPU need to be configured.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

Page 139: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 139 of 203

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.11.3 GBFD-111803 A Interface Circuit Management

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

This feature is to control the maintenance of the single circuit of the terrestrial circuits or the

whole PCM circuit group. When the TC subrack is configured on the BSC side, the circuit

management of the A interface can be performed directly.

Benefits

From the perspective of the O&M and transmission quality, the remote circuit management

enables the operators to provide the value-added services for subscribers and enhances the

network quality.

Huawei GBSS provides all the functions of the circuit management through the LMT,

facilitating the remote maintenance of the TC subrack such as the debugging and problem

locating. Compared with the independent O&M of the TC subrack, this feature improves the

efficiency of the O&M and reduces the O&M cost.

Description

Huawei GBSC supports the circuit management of the A interface, which involves the circuit

assignment, blocking, circuit group blocking, and unblocking of the A interface.

This feature provides the following functions:

Controls the maintenance of the single circuit of the terrestrial circuits or the whole PCM circuit group.

Provides the blocking or unblocking of the single circuit of the terrestrial circuits caused by the intervention of the LMT or equipment fault.

Provides the blocking or unblocking of the circuit group of the terrestrial circuits caused

by the intervention of the LMT or equipment fault.

Provides the message retransmission mechanism when the terrestrial circuit management

message (circuit blocking, unblocking, or reset) is sent and no response is received within the predefined period.

Supports the uninstalled circuit function.

Circuit assignment of the A interface:

During a call or the handover, the circuits of the A interface that are specified in the MSC

signaling can be allocated and occupied. After the circuits are allocated and occupied, the

BSC sends an Assignment Complete message to the MSC.

Circuit blocking:

Page 140: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 140 of 203

When the circuit on the BSS side is unavailable, the BSC should notify the MSC that the

circuit is changed to unavailable. This process uses the circuit blocking function. The message

of the A interface blocking contains the circuit identification code (CIC) used by the circuits

of the A interface. The status of the circuits on both sides of the A interface keeps consistent

during the implementation of the circuit blocking function.

Circuit unblocking:

When the fault of the BSC is rectified or the circuit status is available, the BSC should notify

the MSC of the change in the circuit status. The message of the A interface unblocking

contains a circuit of the A interface, which is identified by the CIC.

Circuit group blocking:

When several circuits of the A interface need to be blocked, the command to block the circuit

group is used. The command includes multiple A interface circuits, which are identified by the

CICs.

Circuit group unblocking:

When several circuits of the A interface need to be unblocked, the command to unblock the

circuit group is used. The command includes multiple A interface circuits, which are

identified by the CICs.

Uninstalled circuit:

During the circuit blocking, unblocking, reset, assignment, incoming BSC handover, or BSC

reset procedure, if the specified circuit does not exist, the BSC sends an uninstalled circuit

message to the MSC.

Circuit reset:

When the local fault occurs on the system, use this function to restore the circuit status

information of the BSC or MSC (for example, abnormal SCCP connection release). If a

circuit becomes idle after abnormal SCCP connection release, the BSC notifies the MSC of its

status.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

Page 141: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 141 of 203

1.11.4 GBFD-111804 A Interface Protocol Process

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

Huawei BSS supports the A interface-based signaling and protocol processing, which is a

basic signaling function specified in the GSM specifications.

Benefits

Huawei BSS supports the A interface-based signaling and protocol processing, which conform

to the international protocol. With this feature, Huawei BSS can be interconnected with the

CN of other vendors that complies with the GSM specifications. In addition, operators can

perform the evaluation and bidding in an efficient way, preventing monopoly and reducing the

operation cost.

Description

Huawei BSS implements the A interface-based signaling and protocol process, which supports

the following functions:

Connectionless and connection-oriented SCCP services

RR layer connection, MM layer connection and message sending

Transparent transmission of the DTAP message on the A interface

Incoming/outgoing handover

Internal handover

Handover candidate query

Paging procedure

Flow control

Traffic access control

Classmark update

Connection release

Encryption mode control process

MS message initialization

Data link control

Message check

Circuit group

Processing of abnormal SCCP connection

Queuing

Enhancement

None

Page 142: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 142 of 203

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.11.5 GBFD-111805 A Interface Occupation Rate Monitoring

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

This feature is to monitor the real-time status and usage of the circuits on the A interface and

TC resources through performance measurement.

Benefits

A interface occupation rate monitoring is an important feature for ensuring the network

quality. This feature provides the following benefits for the operators:

Learn the usage of the circuit resources of the A interface in time, providing a basis for the system capacity expansion.

Know about the distribution status of the circuit resources of the A interface in time.

Coordinate the configuration of transmission resources among different networks. Add,

reduce, and re-allocate the transmission resources on the basis of the usage of resources, reducing the network operation cost.

Find the defects of the network planning, improving the principles and methods of the

existing network planning.

Description

This feature is to monitor the usage of the circuits on the A interface and TC resources

through performance measurement of the BSC.

The reports on the occupation rate of the circuit on the A interface and TC resources make the

operators know better about the usage of present resources.

When the circuit occupation rate exceeds the preset threshold, the system will automatically

report an alarm, reminding the user of expanding the capacity of the A interface according to

the actual situation.

The operators add or reduce the circuit resources of the A interface based on the usage of the

circuit resources of the A interface, providing better services for subscribers.

Page 143: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 143 of 203

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.11.6 GBFD-113904 Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

With this feature, the operator can deploy the network to provide radio services in the areas

that are difficult to be reached through conventional transmission.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to provide PS services in special

geographical areas or emergency conditions.

The satellite transmission resources over the Pb interface can be shared with other interfaces.

Description

This feature enables the operator to deploy the network to provide radio services in the areas

that are difficult to be reached through conventional transmission. The PCU can be configured

in the CN equipment room and shared by multiple BSCs.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Page 144: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 144 of 203

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.12 PS Services Features

1.12.1 GBFD-119101 Packet Channel Combination Type

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

This feature supports the packet channel combination type specified in the GSM

specifications.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature supports the packet channel combination type specified in the GSM

specifications.

According to the actual situation, operators determine whether to activate the PBCCH.

Then, adjust the rate of the PDTCH in a flexible way to perform the network planning properly.

Description

According to 3GPP TS 43.064, the packet channel is classified into the following types:

Packet Broadcast Control Channel (PBCCH)

The PBCCH is used only on the downlink. It broadcasts specific system information. If

the PBCCH is not available, the BCCH takes the roles of system information broadcasting.

Packet Common Control Channel (PCCCH)

The PCCCH is the logical channel of common control signaling of the packet data. It is classified into the following channel types: PRACH, PPCH, and PAGCH.

Packet Random Access Channel (PRACH):

It is used only on the uplink. The MS requests to allocate the PDTCH on this channel.

Packet Paging Channel (PPCH):

It is used only on the downlink. The BSS pages the MS through the PPCH. The paging group functionality is applied to the PPCH, and the DRX is also supported. The PPCH

Page 145: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 145 of 203

can be used for paging in CS services as well as in PS services. However, the paging in

CS services is applicable to only Class A MS and Class B MS. When the MS is operating

in packet transmission mode, the PACCH can be used to page the MS that performs the CS services.

Packet Access Grant Channel (PAGCH):

It is used only on the downlink. Before the MS starts packet transmission, the PAGCH

transmits the allocated resources to the MS, enabling the packet transmission. In addition,

when the MS is operating in packet transmission mode, the PACCCH can be used to transmit the allocated resources to the MS on the downlink.

Packet Data Traffic Channel (PDTCH):

It is used for the data transfer in PS mode. In multislot mode, an MS can use multiple PDTCHs to transfer data.

Packet Dedicated Control Channel (PDCCH): It is classified into the PTCCH and the

PACCH.

Packet Timing Advance Control Channel (PTCCH)

It is used to control the timing advance of the MS.

Packet Associated Control Channel (PACCH)

It is used to transfer the signaling information. The signaling information consists of the

verification and the power control information. The PACCH also carries the information

about resource allocation and re-allocation, enabling the capacity allocation of the

PDTCHs or the addition of PACCHs in future. A PACCH can be allocated to one or multiple PDTCHs of an MS.

This feature supports the following channel combination:

Combined PDTCH: PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH

Enhancement

GBSS8.1

GBSS8.1 supports the PBCCH or PCCCH. The following channel combinations are

supported:

Combined PBCCH: PBCCH+PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH

Combined PCCCH: PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU is required, the Packet Process board and Gb interface board is required.

In the multi-band cell, the PBCCH or PCCCH needs to be configured on the TRX in the

compatible frequency band of the BCCH. The PBCCH/PCCCH supports packet data

transmission.

Dependency on BTS hardware

None

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

Page 146: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 146 of 203

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.12.2 GBFD-119102 Packet System Information

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

This feature supports the message types of the packet system information specified in the

GSM specifications.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature supports the message types of the packet system information specified in the GSM specifications and provides the packet access service.

Operators adjust the configuration parameters related to the packet system information in

a flexible way to control the operation of the network and the MS. For example, the network operation mode enabled by the BSC and the access pulse type of the MS.

Description

Packet System Information (PSI) contains the primary radio network parameters of the Um

interface such as network identification parameters, cell selection parameters, system control

parameters, and network function parameters. The reception of the system information

enables the MS to select and access the network properly and to fully utilize multiple services

provided by the network.

The messages of the packet system information are transmitted on the BCCH or the SACCH.

The GPRS service support indication is carried in SI3, SI4, SI7 or SI8, and the parameters

related to the GPRS services are carried in SI13. The DTM support information is carried in

SI6.

SI13 is broadcast on the BCCH provided that the cell supports GPRS services. The

configuration of the PBCCH is optional for a cell. SI13 is received by the MS, indicating

whether the PBCCH is configured in a cell. The PBCCH mainly broadcasts the messages of

the GPRS packet system information.

Messages of the packet system information are PSI1, PSI2, PSI3, PSI3bis, and PSI13.

PSI1: Mainly contains the information about the cell selection, PRACH control, control

channel, and power control parameter.

PSI2: Mainly contains the information such as the reference frequency list, cell allocation

table, GPRS mobile allocation table, and PCCCH description.

PSI3: Mainly contains the information about the BCCH allocation list of the neighboring cell

and cell selection parameters of the serving cell and non-serving cell. PSI3bis: Mainly

contains the information about the BCCH allocation list of the neighboring cell and cell

selection parameters of the non-serving cell.

Page 147: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 147 of 203

PSI13: Like SI13 broadcast on the BCCH, this message mainly contains the access-related

information associated with the GPRS cells.

PSI1–PSI3: These messages can be broadcast on the PBCCH or the PACCH. PSI13 can be

broadcast only on the PACCH.

If the PBCCH is available in a cell, then the PSI13 is not broadcast on the PACCH. In the case

of the MS in the transmission state, PSI1 is periodically broadcast on the PACCH. If the

PBCCH is not available in a cell, then only PSI13 is periodically broadcast on the PACCH.

Huawei BSS allows the transmission of all GPRS-related system information, enabling the

controlling retransmission, high-speed retransmission, and low-speed retransmission of the

system information. In addition, Huawei BSS controls the transmission of the system

information on the PACCH based on the actual configuration of the PBCCH or the PCCCH in

a cell.

Enhancement

In GBSS8.1, the DTM support information is carried in SI6.

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU is required, and the packet processing board and Gb interface board are

required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.12.3 GBFD-119103 MS Types

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

This feature supports the MS types specified in the GSM specifications.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

Page 148: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 148 of 203

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS

services.

This feature supports different types of the MSs specified in the GSM specifications to perform PS services.

Description

Huawei BSC supports the following MS types:

Class A MS:

The class A MS supports simultaneous attach of GPRS and IMSI, and the MS supports

simultaneous operation of GPRS and CS services.

Class B MS:

The class B MS supports simultaneous attach of GPRS and IMSI, but the MS can perform

only one service at a time.

Class C MS:

The class C MS can access only the GSM or GPRS network at a certain time. If the MS

supports both PS and CS services, the services can be only switched over manually and

cannot be implemented simultaneously.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU is required, the Packet Process board and Gb interface board is required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

MSs must support this feature.

1.12.4 GBFD-119104 MAC Mode

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Page 149: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 149 of 203

Summary

This feature supports the MAC mode specified in the GSM specifications.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services.

This feature supports the MAC mode specified in the GSM specifications. After the MS

accesses the network, the USF is scheduled to ensure that the PS services of the MS are processed continuously and multiple MSs can be multiplexed on a PDCH.

Description

Huawei GBSS supports two MAC modes: dynamic allocation and extended dynamic

allocation. This feature supports dynamic allocation.

Dynamic allocation

The MS in the ready state obtains the USF information by decoding RLC/MAC headers,

and then determines whether an uplink radio block or a group of uplink radio blocks are

used to transmit data on the PDCH during the period of transmitting the next block. In this way, the BSS can control the uplink access of multiple MSs on a timeslot.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU is required, and the packet processing board and Gb interface board are

required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

The extended dynamic allocation depends on GBFD-119401 EDA.

Dependency on other NEs

None

Page 150: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 150 of 203

1.12.5 GBFD-119105 RLC Mode

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

This feature supports the RLC mode specified in the GSM specifications.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS

services.

This feature determines the RLC mode and establishes PS services based on the

information contained in the uplink packet resource request sent by the MS or LLC PDU sent by the CN.

Description

Two RLC modes are supported: RLC acknowledged mode and RLC unacknowledged mode.

The RLC mode of the uplink TBF is dependent on the type of the service requested by the MS;

the RLC mode of the downlink TBF, however, is dependent on the RLC mode of the QoS

parameters contained in the downlink LLC PDU.

RLC acknowledged mode: In this mode, the receiver acknowledges the received RLC data

blocks, and each data block transmitted on the TBF should be acknowledged; otherwise, the

sender shall resend the lost blocks. Each data block transmitted on the TBF should be

acknowledged until the transmission of all the data is complete and acknowledged. In this

case, the TBF can be released. This mechanism ensures the transmission reliability of the

RLC data blocks.

RLC unacknowledged mode: In this mode, the receiving party acknowledges the received

RLC data blocks as in RLC acknowledged mode. The data block, however, does not require

the acknowledgment from the sending party. The lost data or erroneously transmitted data are

replaced by filling bits. After the data transmission is complete, the TBF can be released.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU is required, and the packet processing board and Gb interface board are

required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

Page 151: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 151 of 203

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.12.6 GBFD-119106 Coding Scheme

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

This feature supports the GPRS CS coding schemes specified in the GSM specifications.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services.

This feature supports GPRS CS-1 and CS-2 specified in the GSM specifications.

Description

According to GSM specifications, the GPRS can use four coding schemes, namely, CS-1,

CS-2, CS-3, and CS-4. CS-1 and CS-2 have a data rate of 9.05 kbit/s and 13.4 kbit/s

(containing the header of the RLC block). This ensures 100% and 90% cell coverage, meeting

the co-channel interference requirement of C/I = 9 dB.

The requirements for the radio transmission quality vary with the transmission rate of the

coding schemes. The higher the transmission rate, the higher the requirements for the radio

transmission quality. The half-rate and 1/3 rate bits in the RLC blocks of CS-1 and CS-2 are

used for the forward error correction (FEC). Therefore, the C/I requirement is reduced.

During the data transmission, the BSC dynamically adjusts the channel coding or decoding

mode according to the retransmission rate of the RLC blocks transmitted on the uplink or

downlink TBF. This improves the transmission rate on the basis of guaranteed transmission

quality, fully utilizing the radio resources.

This feature supports CS-1, CS-2, and dynamic adjustment between CS-1 and CS-2.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

Page 152: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 152 of 203

A built-in PCU is required, and the packet processing board and Gb interface board are

required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

MSs must support this feature.

1.12.7 GBFD-119107 Networking Control Mode

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

This feature supports the network control mode specified in the GSM specifications.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services.

This feature supports the network control mode specified in the GSM specifications.

Operators can adjust the network control mode according to the different cell reselection

policies.

Description

The following describes three network control modes in cell reselection concerning the

relationships between the MS, network, and MR.

NC0: In this mode, the MS performs autonomous cell reselection without sending the MR to

the network.

NC1: In this mode, the MS performs autonomous cell reselection and sends the MR to the

network.

NC2: In this mode, the network controls the cell reselection and the MS sends the MR to the

network. In this case, the MS does not perform autonomous cell reselection.

This feature supports both NC0 and NC1.

Enhancement

None

Page 153: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 153 of 203

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU is required, and the packet processing board and Gb interface board are

required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.12.8 GBFD-119108 Network Operation Mode Support

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

This feature supports Network Operation Mode II and Network Operation Mode III specified

in the GSM specifications.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS

services.

This feature supports Network Operation Mode II and Network Operation Mode III

specified in the GSM specifications. In this way, operators can adjust the network operation mode according to different networking modes and paging policies.

Description

The GSM specifications define three network operation modes according to the paging mode

adopted for CS and GPRS services: Network Operation Mode I, Network Operation Mode II,

and Network Operation Mode III.

Network Operation Mode I:

The BSS sends the CS paging message and the PS paging message to the GPRS-attached MS

on the PCH of the CCCH or the PPCH of the PCCCH. In this case, the MS listens to only the

PCH or the PPCH. If the PDCH is allocated to the MS, then the BSS sends a CS paging

message to the MS on this channel provided that the Gs interface is used and the paging

coordination function is enabled.

Page 154: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 154 of 203

Network Operation Mode II:

The BSS sends the CS paging message and the PS paging message to the GPRS-attached MS

on the PCH of the CCCH. In this case, the MS listens to only the PCH of the CCCH and the

paging coordination function is not required.

Network Operation Mode III:

The BSS sends a CS paging message to the GPRS-attached MS on the PCH of the CCCH. If a

PPCH is configured in a cell, the PS paging message is sent on this channel. Otherwise, the

PS paging message is sent on the PCH of the CCCH. If a PPCH is configured in a cell, the

MS should listen to the CS paging channel and PS paging channel simultaneously. In this case,

the paging coordination function is not required.

Network Operation Mode

CS Paging Message

GPRS Paging Message

Paging Coordination

I PPCH PPCH Required

PCH PCH

PACCH Not used

II PCH PCH Not required

III PCH PPCH Not required

PCH PCH

The network operation mode is sent to the MS through the system information. In addition,

the network operation modes should be consistent in a routing area (RA).

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU is required, and the packet processing board and Gb interface board are

required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

None

Page 155: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 155 of 203

1.12.9 GBFD-119109 QoS (Best Effort)

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

This feature supports the quality of service (QoS) (Best Effort) specified in the GSM

specifications.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services.

This feature allocates more resources to the MS, and improves the packet throughput of the MS, meeting the requirements of the QoS.

Description

The Quality of Service (QoS) of the GPRS network contains the following specifications:

priority, delay level, reliability level, peak throughput level, average throughput level, and

guaranteed bit rate. Each specification can be further divided into multiple levels. These

specifications are end-to-end requirements of the entire packet data transfer. The

specifications involve the radio resources, trunk link resources on the Gb interface or IP

transmission resource, transmission bandwidth of the GPRS backbone network, and

processing capability of different GPRS devices.

Huawei BSC6000 allocates more resources to the MS with best effort QoS. In addition, the

BSC6000 adopts the polling scheduling mode to balance the bandwidth for multiple MSs that

are multiplexed on a packet channel.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU is required, and the packet processing board and Gb interface board are

required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Page 156: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 156 of 203

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.12.10 GBFD-119110 Access

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

This feature supports the packet access specified in the GSM specifications.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services.

This feature supports the packet access initiated by the MS that is specified in the GSM

specifications.

Description

The RLC/MAC layer of an MS initiates a packet access if the MS needs to transmit data. The

packet access of an MS has the following types: short access, one phase access, two phase

access, and single block access without TBF establishment.

Access type selection

If less than eight RLC blocks are transmitted, the channel request type of the MS is short

access. The number of blocks should be calculated on the basis of CS-1. If more than

eight RLC blocks are transmitted and the requested RLC mode is the acknowledged

mode, the channel request type of the MS should be one phase access or two phase

access. If the data to be sent is an MR, then the channel request type of the MS should be

single block access without TBF establishment. The following channel request types are

also defined: paging response, cell update, and mobility management. These channel request types are generally processed in one phase access or two phase access manner.

Access procedure

Short access and one phase access: Radio resources such as TFI and USF are allocated to

the MS after the BSS receives a Packet Channel Request message.

Two phase access: A radio block is allocated to the MS after the BSS receives a Packet

Channel Request message. The MS sends a Packet Resource Request message on the

allocated radio block to request resources. Upon reception of this message, the BSS

allocates resources such as TFI and USF to the MS. Then, the MS sends data on the allocated resources.

The Packet Channel Request message is an 8-bit or 11-bit access burst, which carries a

small amount of information. The Packet Resource Request message, however, is an

RLC/MAC signaling packet in CS-1 coding scheme. Therefore, the two phase access can

carry relatively more information (including the TLLI, multislot capability of the MS, and radio priority). This helps allocate appropriate resources to the MS.

Page 157: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 157 of 203

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU is required, and the packet processing board and Gb interface board are

required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.12.11 GBFD-119111 Assignment

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

This feature supports the packet assignment procedure specified in the GSM specifications.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services.

This feature supports the PS services initiated by the network or MS.

Description

The packet assignment is a process for allocating packet radio resources to the MS and

establishing TBF. Huawei BSS supports the uplink or downlink assignment on the CCCH or

PACCH.

Uplink assignment on the CCCH:

When the MS in packet idle mode (no TBF available) initiates an uplink access, the BSS

allocates resources to the MS to establish an uplink TBF after receiving a Packet Channel

Request message (one phase access) or a Packet Resource Request (two phase access) on the CCCH.

Page 158: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 158 of 203

Uplink assignment on the PACCH:

When the MS is in downlink packet transfer mode, it sends a DOWNLINK ACK message

containing the uplink channel request to request the establishment of the TBF. Upon reception

of this message, the BSS allocates resources to the MS to establish an uplink TBF.

Downlink assignment on the CCCH:

When the MS is in packet idle mode (no TBF available), the BSS allocates resources to the

MS on the CCCH to establish the downlink TBF after receiving an LLC PDU that is sent

from the SGSN to the MS.

Downlink assignment on the PACCH:

When the MS is in uplink packet transfer mode (uplink TBF available), the BSS allocates

resources to the MS on the PACCH to establish the downlink TBF after receiving an LLC

PDU that is sent from the SGSN to the MS.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU is required, and the packet processing board and Gb interface board are

required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.12.12 GBFD-119112 PS Paging

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

This feature supports the GPRS PS paging procedure specified in the GSM specifications.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

Page 159: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 159 of 203

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS

services.

This feature supports the basic GPRS PS paging procedure, which can establish a packet call initiated by the network.

Description

When the downlink data is sent to the MS, the SGSN needs to initiate a PS paging procedure

to accurately locate the MS.

The SGSN sends a paging request message to the BSC on the Gb interface. Then, the BSC

converts this message into the Packet Paging Request message and sends it to the MS. If the

PCCCH is available in the BSC, this message is sent on the PPCH; if the PCCCH is not

available in the BSC, this message is sent on the PCH.

Upon reception of the Packet Paging Request message, the MS initiates the procedure for

establishing an uplink TBF. Then, the MS sends the paging response packet in data form to

the BSC on the Um interface and the BSC forwards it to the SGSN. After the SGSN receives

the paging response packet, the downlink data is transmitted provided that the paging

response packet is processed.

PS paging on the CCCH

In Network Operation Mode II, the PS paging is sent on the CCCH.

In Network Operation Mode III, the PS paging is sent on the CCCH if the PCCCH is not configured in the cell.

CS paging on the CCCH

In Network Operation Mode II or Network Operation Mode III, the CS paging is sent on the CCCH.

This feature supports the paging in Network Operation Mode II and Network Operation Mode

III.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU is required, and the packet processing board and Gb interface board are

required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

Page 160: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 160 of 203

None

1.12.13 GBFD-119113 Timing Advance Update

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

This feature supports the timing advance (TA) update procedure specified in the GSM

specifications.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services.

This feature supports the basic TA update procedure to ensure that the MS can obtain the correct TA and keep the continuity of the packet call.

The TA is a basis for the feature of the packet concentric cell handover.

Description

Huawei BSC6000 supports the continual TA update on the packet timing advanced control

channel (PTCCH). In the uplink or downlink assignment message, the BSC allocates TAI to

the MS to identify the PTCCH. The MS periodically sends a random access burst on the

specified uplink PTCCH and the BSS obtains the TA from the burst and sends it to the MS on

the downlink PTCCH.

During the initial establishment of the TA, the BSS obtains the TA from the Packet Channel

Request message sent by the MS, and sends the Packet Uplink/Downlink Assignment

message containing the TA to the MS. The MS uses this TA until the continual timing advance

update procedure is complete and a new TA is obtained.

TA of packet downlink assignment: If no valid TA can be obtained through the downlink

assignment, the BSS sends the packet POLLING message and obtains the TA from the

random access burst that is used by the MS.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU is required, and the packet processing board and Gb interface board are

required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Page 161: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 161 of 203

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.12.14 GBFD-119115 Power Control

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

This feature supports the uplink open-loop power control procedure specified in the GSM

specifications.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services.

This feature supports the uplink open-loop power control procedure specified in the GSM specifications.

Based on the adjustment of the parameter configuration, operators can reduce the MS

power consumption and interference in an efficient way and improve the system capacity.

Description

This feature improves the usage of frequencies, increases the system capacity, and reduces the

power consumption of the MS. Because there is no continuous bi-directional connection

during the transmission of packet data, the power control of the GPRS is more complex.

Huawei BSC6000 provides the uplink open-loop power control algorithm. The formula of the

algorithm complies with 3GPP TS 45.008.

The basic principle of the open-loop power control is to assume that the path loss in the uplink

is the same as the path loss in the downlink. Therefore, the MS can adjust the output power

based on the receive level.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

Page 162: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 162 of 203

A built-in PCU is required, and the packet processing board and Gb interface board are

required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.12.15 GBFD-119116 Uplink Flow Control

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

This feature is to effectively control the random access on the PRACH or the RACH by

prolonging the retransmission interval of the random accesses or prohibiting the access of the

MSs of a certain access class.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS

services.

This feature ensures the capacity of the BSC and the service quality on the basis of the reasonable flow control of the random access on the PRACH or the RACH.

Description

If excessive MSs request GPRS resources within a cell or BSC at the same time, the GPRS

resources may be insufficient and the uplink may be congested.

The uplink flow control is used to control the service requests (including the response to

paging) that are initiated by the MS, and to delay the response to these service requests. The

control of uplink service requests is implemented through the control of the number of

random access requests on the PRACH/RACH. The delay of the response to the service

requests initiated by the MS is implemented through the queue indication procedure.

Decreasing the number of random access requests on the PRACH/RACH is implemented

through prolonging the random access retransmission interval or prohibiting the access of the

MSs of a certain class. Prolonging the retransmission interval of the random access may affect

the response speed and service quality of the system but it helps improve the capacity of the

system. Therefore, it is applicable to some suitable situations. Prohibiting the MSs of a certain access class may affect the service quality of the system.

Page 163: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 163 of 203

In addition, Huawei BSC6000 handles the overload in a policy from the service perspective

and the operation perspective. For different types of overloads, there are different handling

policies.

For example, for the overload of radio resources, the system reduces the load to be processed

on the basis of priorities by performing the following steps until the overload problem is

solved:

Delay the response to the access request with low QoS or reject the access request with low QoS.

Release the TBF of the MS with low QoS.

Take turns to block the MSs of a certain class from accessing the network.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU is required, and the packet processing board and Gb interface board are

required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.12.16 GBFD-119117 Flow Control on Gb Interface

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

This feature supports the procedure for the flow control on the Gb interface.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services.

Page 164: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 164 of 203

On the basis of the flow control policy of the Gb interface and the parameter

configuration, this feature prevents frequent data loss caused by the congestion on the Gb interface or the transmission interruption caused by insufficient flow.

This feature enhances the user experience and ensures the packet throughput of the BSS.

Description

Because the physical media and transmission protocols on the Gb interface are different from

those on the Um interface, the two interfaces have different data transmission rates. The data

rate on the Gb interface is greater than that on the Um interface. In addition, the data

transmission rate in the downlink on the Um interface is subject to various factors such as the

multislot capability of the MS, radio quality, and radio channels available in the cell. In

addition, the data transmission rate is unstable. Therefore, the flow control of downlink data is

required.

When the cell status is normal, the BSC initiates the flow control procedure. The BSC reports

the bucket size and rate of the cell according to the radio packet channels in the cell. In

addition, the BSC reports the bucket size and rate of the MS according to the resource

occupation of the MS. Based on the reported parameters, the SGSN adjusts the downlink data

rates of the cell and of each MS to implement the flow control.

The bucket of a cell refers to the maximum packet data storage space that is reserved for the

cell. The bucket varies according to the number of packet channels in the cell.

The bucket of an MS refers to the maximum packet data storage space that is reserved for the

MS. The bucket varies according to the number of channels that are allocated to the MS.

When the cell status is normal, the BSC initiates the flow control procedure. The BSC reports

the bucket size and rate of the cell according to the radio packet channels in the cell. In

addition, the BSC reports the bucket size and rate of the MS according to the resource

occupation of the MS. Based on the reported parameters, the SGSN adjusts the downlink data

rates of the cell and of each MS to implement the flow control.

The bucket rate refers to the data transmission rate. The BSC can perform data flow control in

the downlink. It periodically reports the bucket sizes and rates of the current cell and of an

MS to the SGSN and adjusts the reported parameters based on the changes in cell packet

resources and in the resource occupation of the MS.

Downlink flow control involves downlink BVC flow control and downlink MS flow control:

Downlink BVC flow control:

The BSC reports the flow control parameters such as the maximum bucket size and the leak rate of the BVC to the SGSN.

Downlink MS flow control:

The SGSN reports flow control parameters such as the maximum bucket size and the leak rate of the MS to the SGSN.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

Page 165: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 165 of 203

A built-in PCU is required, and the packet processing board and Gb interface board are

required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.12.17 GBFD-113101 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.

Summary

With this feature, fixed channels do not need to be configured for the PS services, the TCH

and the PDCH can be automatically converted as required.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

Reduces the impact of GPRS services on the GSM speech services, decreases the

maintenance and configuration workload, and increases channel usage and network

capacity.

Improves the performance of the PS services and increases the operators' revenue.

Description Packet channel types

The PDCH is classified into static PDCH and dynamic PDCH based on the bearer

services (CS services or PS services).

The static PDCH is used for the PS services only.

The dynamic PDCH is a TCH during the initialization process. In the case of packet access, the TCH and the PDCH can be dynamically converted.

PDCH dynamic adjustment

The static PDCH is used for the PS services only. The dynamic PDCH is a TCH during

the initialization process. When the packet resources are insufficient, the PCU requests

dynamic PDCHs from the BSC for the PS services. When the circuit resources are insufficient, the BSC requests dynamic PDCHs that are used as TCHs from the PCU.

In this manner, the channel resources are flexibly used as required. Therefore, the usage

of resources is increased, and the complexity of PDCH configuration and the workload

Page 166: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 166 of 203

of maintenance and configuration are reduced. In addition, the impact of unreasonable

PDCH configuration on the service performance is reduced.

Enhancement

GBSS7.0

PDCH Preemption Priority: In the latter period of the GSM network development, the

requirements for the PS services are preferentially met because of the significant increase in

the data service demand. Huawei PCU equipment supports three types of PDCH preemption

priorities: all dynamic channels preemptable, packet control channels unpreemptable, and all

dynamic channels carrying services unpreemptable. This application enhancement optimizes

the performance of the PS services by limiting channel preemption of the CS services. The

operators can implement different packet allocation strategies by configuring preemption

priority.

All dynamic channels preemptable: The CS services can preempt all dynamic channels.

Packet control channels unpreemptable: The CS services can preempt all the other dynamic

channels except the packet control channels.

All dynamic channels carrying services unpreemptable: The CS services cannot preempt all

the dynamic channels carrying services.

GBSS8.0

Overall Dynamic PDCH Availability: Except for static PDCHs, all the other channels can be

converted in real time based on the situation of the PS services and the CS services. If

required, TCHs can be converted to PDCHs for the PS services. With this application

enhancement, more PDCHs can be converted when the CS services are not busy. This can

alleviate the decrease in the transmission rate due to PDCH multiplexing. This flexible

mechanism can maximize the channel usage and optimize the distribution of PDCHs and

TCHs. In addition, the network planning is simple and therefore you can expand the capacity

if required.

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU, a packet processing board, and a Gb interface board are required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

None

Page 167: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 167 of 203

1.12.18 GBFD-119205 Dynamically Adjusting the RRBP Frequency

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

With this feature, the relative reserved block period (RRBP) frequency is dynamically

adjusted according to the status of the uplink TBF and the downlink TBF. The data blocks

with the RRBP flag in the downlink are sent at different intervals.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

Optimizes the uplink access rate of PS services, improving the performance of the TCP

services such as FTP downloading by increasing the rate of sending the TCP ACK message. As a result, user experience is enhanced.

Reduces unnecessary data flow in the uplink and the impact on other users on the same PDCH.

Description

This feature optimizes the RRBP frequency based on two factors: uplink TBF status and the

phase of delayed downlink TBF release.

Uplink TBF status and RRBP frequency

During the downlink transmission process, the BSC periodically sends data blocks with

RRBP flag to reserve uplink resources for the MS to respond with the PACKET

DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message to report the receiving status of the downlink data.

When the MS needs to send data in the uplink but the uplink TBF does not exist, the MS

can carry the channel request information in the PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK

message to initiate the access. Therefore, if the frequency of sending the data blocks with

RRBP flag is increased at this time, the access rate of the MS can be increased.

On the other hand, the PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message seizes the uplink

bandwidth. Therefore, when the uplink TBF already exists, the uplink expenditure is

reduced and the uplink data bandwidth is increased if the frequency of sending the data blocks with RRBP flag is reduced.

Phase of delayed downlink TBF release and RRBP frequency

The MS generally has a demand for sending uplink data in the earlier period of the

delayed downlink TBF release after the data transmission in the downlink is complete.

At this time, the BSS system uses a high frequency for sending the data blocks with the

RRBP flag. In the latter period of the delayed downlink TBF release, there is less data to

be sent in the uplink. At this time, the BSS system uses a low frequency for sending the data blocks with the RRBP flag.

This feature dynamically adjusts the frequency for sending the data blocks with the

RRBP flag based on the uplink TBF status and the phase of delayed downlink TBF

release. When the uplink TBF exists and the delayed TBF release is in the latter period, a

low frequency can be used to save the uplink bandwidth. When the uplink TBF does not

Page 168: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 168 of 203

exist and the delayed TBF release is in the earlier period, a high frequency can be used to

increase the uplink access rate of the MS.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU, a packet processing board, and a Gb interface board are required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other NEs

None

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.12.19 GBFD-119303 Load Sharing

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

Based on the traffic load on the PDCHs, load sharing applies to the dynamic adjustment of the

MS distribution on the PDCHs to improve the channel utilization and single-user PS service

rate.

Benefits

This feature helps improve the channel utilization and PS service rate.

Description

The strategy for load sharing includes the following three parts:

When an MS accesses the network, the system preferentially assigns a TRX with a light load

to the MS to adjust the load distribution between TRXs.

When the MS provides PS services, the system assigns the MS a PDCH or PDCHs with a light load. The occupancy of channel resources varies during the transmission. For example, if

Page 169: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 169 of 203

the MS releases channel resources when the service ends, some TRXs or PDCHs are idle. If

the MS accessing the network is not shifted from the channel with heavy load to the channel

with a light load, the channel resources are wasted. According to the load on the PDCHs, the

BSS shifts the MS carried on the PDCH with a heavy load to the one with a light load.

Therefore, load sharing is implemented and the single-user rate increases.

When the channel is released, the system adjusts the load distribution between channels

according to the traffic load on each channel to ensure load balance on the PDCHs, optimally

utilizing channel resources.

Enhancement

GBSS8.1

Load sharing during the release of radio resources: This function enhances the load balance

between TRXs when radio resources are released. Therefore, the resources on all the TRXs

are reassigned in the cell. That is, the MSs carried on the TRXs with a heavy load are assigned

to those with a light load, and then the MSs carried on the PDCHs with a heavy load are

assigned to those with a light load so that the load balance between all the TRXs in the cell is

realized and the channel resources are optimally utilized. For example, an MS transmits data

for a long time.

During the data transmission, if radio resources are released by other MSs, the BSC

determines whether the TRX used by the MSs that release radio resources are idle. If the TRX

is idle, the MS performing long-time data transmission is reassigned with the channels on the

idle TRX. Therefore, the throughput of the MS is increased.

When the traffic load of the GPRS channels decreases, some GPRS MSs are shifted from the

EGPRS channel to the GPRS channels to increase the channel utilization and minimize the

impact on the EGPRS services.

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU, a packet processing board, and a Gb interface board are required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

None

Page 170: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 170 of 203

1.12.20 GBFD-119501 Adaptive Adjustment of Uplink and Downlink Channels

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0.

Summary

The uplink and downlink channel adaptive adjustment implements dynamic assignment of the

number of uplink and downlink channels for the MSs based on the uplink and downlink

service data flow.

Benefits

In the case of the services that are processed on both the uplink and downlink such as ping

large packets and Push to Talk over Cellular (PoC), this feature helps to reduce the system

transmission delay.

In the case of the downlink-preferred services such as FTP download, this feature helps

improve the downlink data throughput.

In the case of the uplink-preferred services such as e-mail sending, this feature, used together

with extended dynamic allocation (EDA), helps improve the uplink data throughput.

Description

The BSS measures the data throughput of uplink and downlink of each temporary block flow

(TBF) regularly to determine the current service type of the TBF.

If the downlink-preferred service is performed, the BSS assigns as many downlink timeslots

as possible to the MS. For an MS with multislot class of 12, the BSS uses the 4+1 DL/UL

timeslot configuration preferentially.

If the uplink-preferred service is performed, the BSS assigns as many uplink timeslots as

possible to the MS. For an MS with multislot class of 12, the BSS uses the 1+4 DL/UL

timeslot configuration preferentially used together with EDA.

If the service processed on both the uplink and downlink is performed, the BSS tries to assign

the timeslots of uplink and downlink asymmetrically to the MS. For an MS with multislot

class of 12, the BSS uses the 3+2 DL/UL timeslot configuration preferentially.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

A built-in PCU, a packet processing board, and a Gb interface board are required.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Page 171: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 171 of 203

Dependency on other GBSS features

This feature depends on the following features:

GBFD-114101 GPRS

GBFD-114201 EGPRS

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.13 Antenna System Solution

1.13.1 MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier)

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary

This feature provides a solution to the TMA connection. Huawei MBTS complies with the

AISG1.1 and AISG2.0 protocols.

Benefits

In the uplink coverage-limited network, the use of the TMA can improve the receiver

sensitivity, enlarge the cell radius, reduce the number of MBTSs, and save the cost.

Description

The TMA is used to amplify the uplink signals. It is an optional device for the antenna and

feeder system. The TMA can compensate the feeder loss caused by long feeders. Therefore,

the uplink sensitivity is increased and the uplink coverage capability is improved.

Huawei MBTS supports the third-party TMA, including AISG TMA.

The MBTS supplies power to and controls the TMA. Huawei MBTS can provide 10 V to 13

V output voltage to the TMA. When a major alarm related to the TMA is reported, the system

automatically sets the attenuation value of the RX channel to 0. After the alarm is cleared, the

system automatically sets the attenuation value of the RX channel to the configured value.

In the case of the AISG TMA, the RET control signal, power, and RF signal are transmitted

through the feeder cable. Therefore, operation and maintenance of the AISG TMA is easy.

Smart bias tee (SBT) provides power supply to the TMA and the RET control signal to the

RCU through the feeder cable.

Huawei provides dual TMAs. Each TMA consists of two TX/RX branches, and only one

TMA is required in each sector. Each TMA includes also a supervision and alarm unit in the

low noise amplifier (LNA). The functions of both branches are the same and the function of

one pair of branches is described as follows:

Page 172: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 172 of 203

The RX channel of each branch consists of two RX filters and an LNA. The LNA can be

automatically bypassed when the DC is faulty. There is a bias tee in the BTS port of the TMA.

For the SMART TMA, this bias tee is called the smart bias tee. Bias tee can separate the DC

current from the RF signals and provide power supply to the LNA and the RET control signal

to the RCU. The TX channel includes a TX filter.

Huawei MBTS supports two kinds of TMA with the gain of 24 dB and 12 dB.

Enhancement GSM

The GBSS6.1 complies with the AISG1.1 protocol.

UMTS

The RAN5.0 supports STMA and complies with the AISG1.1 protocol.

The RAN6.1 supports STMA and complies with the AISG2.0 protocol.

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

Page 173: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 173 of 203

1.13.2 MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS7.0 and RAN5.0.

Summary

The feature provides a solution to remote adjustment of the antenna tilt. The user can adjust

the remote electrical tilt (RET) antenna tilt on the M2000 or LMT.

Benefits

This feature provides the following benefits:

The RET antennas in multiple sites can be remotely adjusted. Therefore, the efficiency of adjusting the antenna tilt is improved and the cost of network optimization is reduced.

The adjustment of the RET antenna is not affected by the weather.

It is easy to adjust the RET antenna of a site that is difficult to reach.

Description

The tilt of the RET antenna can be adjusted remotely.

After an antenna is installed, the antenna tilt needs to be adjusted to optimize the network.

The antenna tilt can be remotely adjusted through the electrical control.

The phase shifter of the antenna can be controlled by the stepper motor outside the antenna.

You can adjust the antenna tilt when the system is powered on and monitor the tilt in real time.

Therefore, the precise remote adjustment of the antenna tilt can be achieved.

The following figure shows the operating principle of the RET antenna.

Figure 1-4 Working principle of the RET antenna

RCU

Phase shifter

Pulling bar

Radome

Control cable

(DC+ control signals)

Page 174: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 174 of 203

Remote Control Unit (RCU) is the driving motor of the phase shifter of the RET antenna. The

RCU receives and executes the control commands from the MBTS to drive the stepper motor.

A pulling bar connects the stepper motor and the phase shifter. When the stepper motor is

triggered, the pulling bar moves and then the phase of the phase shifter changes through the

gears. In this situation, the phase of each element of the array antenna changes regularly. Then,

the direction of the main beam of the antenna changes accordingly. Therefore, the antenna tilt

is adjusted.

The MBTS supplies the DC power to the stepper motor and communicates with it through the

AISG interface on the motor.

In the Huawei RET solution, the RET antenna can be controlled remotely or locally through a

command sent from the M2000 or LMT.

The MBTS modulates that command to the On-Off-Keying (OOK) signals. The RF module

transfers the DC power and the OOK signals to the STMA or the SBT through the feeder

cables. The STMA or the SBT demodulates the OOK signals to RS485 signals and then sends

the RS485 signals and part of the DC power to the RCU. No additional control cable is

required.

The Huawei RET solution supports the RET cascading control. Several cascading RET

antennas can be controlled by the signals coming from the same control cable. The cascading

solution helps save the cost of the SBTs.

The Huawei RET solution supports the 2G/3G RET cascading control. The 3G RET antennas

can be cascaded with the 2G RET antennas. At the OMC of the 2G RET antenna, you can

control the tilt of the 3G RET antenna. Meanwhile, at the OMC of the 3G RET antenna, you

can control the tilt of the 2G RET antenna. The cascading helps save the cost of SBTs and

STMAs when the 2G and 3G RET antennas are installed in the same place.

Ant enna

MBTS

RC

U SBT

Ant enna

RC

U

Sect or 1

Ant enna

RC

U

Sect or 2 Sect or 3

Page 175: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 175 of 203

Enhancement GSM

None

UMTS

In RAN6.0, the 3G RET cascading control and 2G/3G RET cascading control are supported.

RAN6.1 complies with the AISG2.0 protocol.

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

BTS

This feature is supported by the all types of BTSs except for the BTS3600C and BTS3002E.

Node B

None

MBTS

None

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

3G/2G NodeB 2G/3G BTS

RC

U

SBT

Dual - band Ant enna

RC

U 2G 3G

Page 176: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 176 of 203

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.13.3 MRFD-210604 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary

This feature is a technique for improving the receive performance of the uplink channels.

Benefits

This feature improves receiver sensitivity and uplink coverage, reducing the CAPEX.

Description

With this feature, the same signal is received by two antennas. Then the two ways of signals

on the two antennas are combined after being processed. Therefore, the signal attenuation is

reduced.

This feature enhances the RX capability of uplink channels. Huawei MBTS supports both

receive diversity and none receive diversity.

With this feature, the MBTS does not require additional devices and algorithms. Compared

with one-way none receive diversity, this feature requires twice the number of RX channels.

In typical scenarios, the receiver sensitivity can be improved by 2 to 3 dB.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

Page 177: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 177 of 203

1.14 Synchronization Mechanism

1.14.1 MRFD-210501 BTS/NodeB Clock

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary

The synchronization of the MBTS clock provides the basis for the frame synchronization. The

MBTS uses this feature to obtain the reference clock sources for the internal frame

synchronization. The MBTS supports three clock synchronization modes: synchronization

with the Iub/Abis clock, synchronization with the BITS clock, and synchronization with GPS

clock. In addition, the MBTS internal clock can work in free-run mode to temporarily provide

reference source.

Benefits

With this feature, the internal clock can be synchronized with the transmission network

without using the auxiliary equipment, saving the cost. In addition, the precision of the

synchronized clock meets the requirements of the radio transmission network and frequencies.

Description

In compliance with the 3GPP specifications, the frequency stability of the master clock of the

MBTS must be between –0.05 ppm and +0.05 ppm. The MBTS can work in multiple clock

synchronization modes to suit different clock topologies:

Synchronization with the Iub/Abis clock (default mode)

The clock source of the MBTS is synchronized with the line clock sources of its upper-level NE such as the MBSC.

Synchronization with GPS

The GPS card is optional unless the MBTS uses a GPS clock as its clock source.

The clock signals are processed and synchronized as follows:

The GPS antenna and feeder system receives GPS signals at 1575.42 MHz, and then

transmits the signals to the GPS card. The system can trace up to eight (normally three or

four) satellites simultaneously. The GPS card processes the signals and transmits them to the main clock module.

Synchronization with the BITS clock

The MBTS can synchronize its clocks with the 2 MHz clock signals from an external

reference clock. The reference clock can be a BITS clock or a 2 MHz clock from the transmission equipment.

Through phase locking and frequency dividing, the main clock module converts the

clock signals into various clock signals required by the MBTS, for example, F_CLK, CLK_4X, and BFN.

In addition to the preceding three synchronization modes, the MBTS internal clock can work

in free-run mode to keep the MBTS running.

Page 178: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 178 of 203

The enhanced stratum 3 OCXO with a high precision works as the master clock of the MBTS.

The OCXO can guarantee the normal operation of the MBTS for up to 90 days.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

1) BTS

The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support the GPS clock input.

2) NodeB

None

3) MBTS

None

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.14.2 MRFD-210502 BSC/RNC Clock

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.

Summary

With this feature, five types of clock sources are supported. Each clock source supports

functions such as 1+1 backup, management of the clock source, query of the clock status, and

maintenance of the link clock.

Benefits

This feature provides various clock input schemes for operators.

The clock source backup function prevents the primary clock faults from affecting services.

Description

MBSC clock provides reliable clock sources for the MBSC to meet the requirements of the

clock precision defined in the 3GPP specifications. Every type of clock source supports 1+1 backup.

Page 179: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 179 of 203

The MBSC clock subsystem consists of the clock processing board GCUa/GCGa and the

clock processing unit in each subrack. The external reference clock signals are transmitted to

the GCUa/GCGa. After a phase lock on the GCUa/GCGa, the clock signals are changed to 8

KHz clock signals. The signals are then transmitted to the SCUa in the same subrack through

the backplane and to the SCUa in the EPS through clock signal cables. Then, the 8 KHz clock

signals on the SCUa are transmitted to other boards in the same subrack through the

backplane.

When the clock source is faulty, the MBSC reports the related alarms and starts the 1+1

backup scheme to ensure the normal operation of the system.

The MBSC clock sources are as follows:

Building integrated timing supply system (BITS)

Line clock extracted from the A/Iu or Abis/Iub interface

Global positioning system (GPS) satellite synchronization clock

8 KHz clock provided by an external device

Local oscillator clock

The MBSC provides the clock control setting functions, including management of the clock

source, query of the clock status, and maintenance of the line clock. The MBSC requires only

one clock source, and the clock source can work in automatic, manual, or self-oscillation

mode.

Automatic

In automatic mode, you do not need to specify a clock source for the current clock. The

system automatically selects a clock source with the highest priority.

Manual

In manual mode, you need to manually specify a clock source for the current clock. The

system does not automatically switch to another clock source even if this clock source is

faulty.

Self-oscillation

The self-oscillation mode is the default clock working mode of the system.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

The GCGa should be configured if the GPS satellite synchronization clock is used.

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

None

Dependency on other NEs

Page 180: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 180 of 203

None

1.15 Maintainability and Testing

1.15.1 GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS12.0.

Summary

Software testing of BSC to determine whether there is one-way audio or cross-talk on the

network. Creates a log of calls on which crosstalk occurs, and provides an alarm mechanism.

Benefits

Alarms allow operators to quickly discover problems with voice quality on the network, and

in conjunction with fault checks, assists with improving network quality.

Creating a log of calls on which crosstalk occurs, which helps with problem diagnosis and

improves efficiency in Operations and Maintenance.

Description

Complaints may arise if problems such as one-way audio or crosstalk frequently occur. With

this type of network problem, without a clear record of the times at which faults occurred, it

can be very difficult to diagnose.

This feature automatically conducts follow-up on a single call, determines whether one-way

or cross talk has occurred. If the problem occurs, it will be recorded in the log: user ID, cell,

affected carrier frequencies and channels. This gives maintenance personnel accurate data that

they can use in problem diagnosis, without having to wait for the problem to reoccur. The

anonymous IMSI and MSISDN will be recorded in the log.

This alarm mechanism associated with this feature regularly collates the one-way radio and

cross talk records for the BSC. If the frequency exceeds a certain threshold, it will make an

alarm report. There is no need to wait for high levels of customer complaints: it is possible to

discover network quality issues very early.

The cross talk test identifies voice coding in the following ways: FR, EFR, AMR_FR

(excluding 12.2 kbit/s), AMR-HR (excluding 6.7 kbit/s and 7.4 kbit/s). The one-way test

supports all voice coding types, but does not support tests of CSD services. Because of the

testing mechanism used, this feature can detect cross talk and one-way problems caused by

problems between the BTS and the A interface; but problems caused by errors between the

Um interface and MSC cannot be detected.

This feature is controlled with an on/off switch. When set to on, the function is effective, and

it has no obvious impact on overall BSC performance.

The cross talk tests are effective during TDM transmission; one-way tests are effective for

both TDM and IP transmission.

Page 181: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 181 of 203

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

Cross talk detection requires the following features:

GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch

GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch

GBFD-115701 TFO

GBFD-115702 TrFO

GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1

GBFD-118601 Abis over IP

One-way radio detection requires the following features:

GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch

GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.15.2 GBFD-119306 Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS13.0.

Summary

Ability to test for crossed pairs at the connection to the Abis interface during TDM

transmission.

Benefits

Alarm for effective early warning of crossed pair issues, reducing subsequent user complaints.

Description

Abis transmission crossed pair detection supports testing for problems with transmission to

the Abis interface. When a transmission issue arises because of a connection error, this feature

automatically detects the issue, designates the transmission as faulty, and assigns no further

services to it.

Page 182: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 182 of 203

The principle behind Abis crossed pair testing is that a command link is assigned to every

physical transmission, and command negotiations can be used to determine whether the

transmission has a fault. This feature is therefore effective in detecting crossed pairs between

different physical transmissions within a single BS. It can detect most crossed pair issues

between transmissions from different BSs, but is ineffective in the following scenarios: when

the configurations of the two BSs are identical, and the crossed pair arises between

transmissions from the same port on the respective BSs. In this situation, even if there is an

error with the physical connections from each BS, because the configurations are identical,

the LAPD connections can all be established as normal.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.15.3 GBFD-119307 Spectrum Scan

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS13.0.

Summary

Using existing board configurations, the Spectrum Scan feature enables maintenance

personnel to remotely scan the working frequencies on the uplink receive band over the Um

interface.

Benefits

This feature helps evaluate the interference to working frequencies, facilitating routine

network optimization and interference detection.

Description

With this feature, Huawei introduces the online spectrum scan function to perform a

long-period spectrum scan on working frequencies. This helps evaluate the interference to the

working frequencies and resolve interference issues.

Page 183: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 183 of 203

With the online frequency spectrum scan function, all working frequencies for a single

timeslot of a single carrier are scanned for a maximum of 48 hours. Scanning results are then

sent to the LMT and saved so that users learn about the uplink interference strength of the

working frequencies in a cell. During a spectrum scan, only the specified timeslot is out of

service, and the cell capacity is not affected.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.15.4 GBFD-119308 Intermodulation Testing

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS13.0.

Summary

Based on the existing frequency and power configurations for a cell, the Intermodulation

Testing feature helps detect the interference to working frequencies caused by intermodulation

products of the antenna system.

Benefits

During routine operation and maintenance (O&M), O&M personnel often need to perform

passive intermodulation (PIM) testing on all sites. The testing efficiency is low without the

Intermodulation Testing feature. The reason is as follows: The BTS sends dummy bursts to

each cell when the BTS is idle and when the BTS transmits signals at full power; then, the

O&M personnel have to compare interference band-related counters for the two periods for

each cell. With this feature, O&M personnel simply run the STR BTSRFTST command to

start testing, and the test results are automatically displayed on the LMT. This improves

operational efficiency, for example, the testing on a single site takes only a few minutes.

Description

Besides the voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR), intermodulation products generated by the

antenna system also affect the uplink receive quality if the intermodulation products fall within the receive frequency band.

Page 184: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 184 of 203

Based on the existing frequency and power configurations for a cell, online PIM testing

automatically and quickly measures the intermodulation products that fall within the receive

frequency band and then determines whether the cell is experiencing intermodulation

interference according to the PIM testing threshold specified by users.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.15.5 GBFD-118607 IP Performance Monitor

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS8.1.

Summary

IP performance monitor (PM) checks the performance of transmission between the BSC and a

BTS in an IP network. By effectively monitoring the changes in QoS-related parameters, IP

PM quickly checks the QoS of an IP bearer network over the Abis interface online. The check

results serve as a basis for flow control and admission control.

Benefits

This feature provides the following functions:

Reports alarms when the packet loss rate for online services exceeds a specified

threshold. For example, an alarm is reported when the transmission quality of the IP bearer network deteriorates.

Performs real-time performance monitoring and traffic measurement. This reduces

maintenance costs by letting operators know the transmission network quality in real time and locate and isolate transmission problems such as unstable transmission rates.

Monitors the bandwidth change for an IP bearer network online, which provides a reference for dynamic bandwidth adjustment over the Abis interface.

Page 185: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 185 of 203

Description

IP PM is a Huawei proprietary protocol and requires support from the BSC and BTS. When IP

transmission is used between the BSC and a BTS, IP PM can be used to check the end-to-end

transmission quality.

The IP PM protocol defines Forward Monitoring (FM) and Backward Reporting (BR)

measurement frames. After IP PM is enabled, the local end (BSC or BTS) periodically sends

FM frames and the peer end (BTS or BSC) responds with BR frames. An FM frame contains

the number of service packets/bytes transmitted in a measurement period and the sending time.

After receiving the FM frames, the peer end adds the receiving time and the number of service

packets/bytes received in the current measurement period to the BR frames and then sends the

BR frames containing the sending time.

‎Figure 1-5 shows the IP PM procedure.

Figure 1-5 IP PM procedure

After being calculated by using the following methods, the information contained in the FM

and BR frames indicates the QoS change for an IP bearer network.

The packet loss rate in the current measurement period can be calculated by using the

following formula:

Packet loss rate = (Number of transmitted packets in FM frames – Number of received

packets in BR frames)/Number of transmitted packets in FM frames

The loopback delay and transmission jitter can be calculated based on the sending time and

receiving time recorded in the FM and BR frames.

IP PM can monitor an IP link or certain types of services such as EDGE services and CS

services in real time. The monitoring results provide a reference for determining the fault

location.

By monitoring a measured IP link between the BSC and a BTS in real time, IP PM calculates

the delay, jitter, and packet loss rate for the IP link, providing a basis for flow control and

admission control. When the delay jitter or packet loss rate on the measured link increases, the

traffic on the logical port where the link is configured is adjusted to reduce the link load and

relieve the link congestion.

Enhancement

GBSS14.0

Enhanced IP PM can accurately collect statistics on IP packets even if the IP packets are

transmitted in an incorrect sequence. In addition, collecting statistics on IP packets is

performed at the IP layer, helping provide accurate statistical results when an IP packet is divided into two packets.

Page 186: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 186 of 203

IP PM can be enabled when IP over E1/T1 mode is used on the BTS side.

The alarm mechanism is improved and now has an appropriate alarm threshold, provides

detailed IP PM activation failure causes and measurement failure causes, and provides related

operations.

The GUI is optimized. The display of DSCP Remarking and the parameters related to

real-time performance monitoring and traffic measurement are optimized, improving user

experience.

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

IP interface boards FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/GOUd/FG2d are required on the Abis interface.

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

GBFD-118601 Abis over IP

Dependency on other NEs

None

1.15.6 GBFD-118614 GSM PS Service Map

Availability

This feature is introduced in GBSS14.0.

Summary

This feature enables the BSC to record PS service information, including service type,

terminal type, and measurement reports. Based on the service information, the Nastar presents

grid-based geographical PS service traffic distribution by terminal type or service type.

Benefits

By using a visualization tool, this feature helps mobile network operators identify the resource

distribution and bottlenecks of the entire network. This feature also helps operators deal with

a flood of data and guides hot spot coverage planning and network capacity expansion.

Description

By using the Nastar based on the Geographic Information System (GIS), this feature provides

the following functions:

Displaying PS traffic volume by service type

The BSC identifies the types of terminals used such as dual-mode MSs or data cards and

records service information. Based on the service information, the Nastar calculates total PS

traffic volume on a per-grid basis and displays the traffic volume by terminal type. If the traffic volume of dual-mode MSs or data cards is too large in certain grids, interoperability

Page 187: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 187 of 203

parameters can be modified to balance the system load. This helps improve service quality

and increases resource usage.

Providing accurate WLAN deployment

The BSC identifies the IDs of terminals processing PS services and records service

information. Based on the service information and terminal IDs, the Nastar determines

terminal types, for example, Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) capable terminals and data cards. In

addition, the Nastar calculates total PS traffic volume on a per-grid basis and displays the

traffic volume by terminal type. If the total traffic volume of Wi-Fi-capable terminals is too

large in certain grids, wireless local area networks (WLANs) can be deployed in these hot

spots.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on BSC hardware

None

Dependency on BTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS features

None

Dependency on other NEs

MSs must support NC1 or NC2.

The Nastar must support this feature. The required Nastar version is Nastar V600R010.

1.16 Documentation

1.16.1 MRFD-210701 Documentation

Availability

This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN6.0.

Summary

The feature describes the available documentation of the products.

Benefits

With this feature, the operators can obtain the product information and can perform

maintenance operations accordingly.

Page 188: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 188 of 203

Description

The customer documentation includes the following documents:

MBSC documents

NodeB documents

BTS documents

The documentation covers the hardware description, installation, commissioning, operation,

and maintenance of the MBSC and MBTS.

The following table describes the documents:

Document Category Description

Product Description Describes the architecture, hardware configuration,

operation and maintenance, and technical specifications of the product.

Hardware Description Describes the hardware of NEs, such as the cabinet, board,

and cable.

Installation Guide Describes the procedures for installing the cabinet, boards,

and cables.

Initial Configuration Guide Describes how to perform the initial configuration of NEs.

Commissioning Guide Describes how to commission the NE to ensure that the

new NE can gain access to the BSS/RAN system.

LMT User Guide Describes the GUI, functions, and operations of the LMT.

Site Maintenance Guide Describes the hardware maintenance items and the

component replacement procedures

Routine Maintenance Guide Describes the routine maintenance methods of the MBSC

and MBTS.

Reconfiguration Guide Describes the common tasks and methods of data

reconfiguration of the MBSC and MBTS.

Reference The reference documents are as follows:

MML command reference: describes the information

about meanings, recommended values, and default values

of the parameters of each command.

Alarm reference: describes the information about meanings of the alarms and how to clear them.

Performance counter reference: describes the information about meanings and measurement points of each counter.

The documents have the following characteristics:

Topic-oriented: Based on the DITA technology, the information is provided under separate topics.

Page 189: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 189 of 203

Powerful advanced search: The information can be searched according to products or

data types.

Enhancement

None

Dependency

Dependency on MBSC hardware

None

Dependency on MBTS hardware

For the dependency on BTS hardware, see the GBSS14.0 Feature List.

Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features

The documentation CD-ROM is delivered with the product.

Dependency on other NEs

None

Page 190: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 190 of 203

A Acronyms and Abbreviations

Numerics

3G 3 rd Generation Mobile Communication System

3GPP2 3rd Generation Partnership Project 2

8PSK 8 Phase Shift Keying

A

AAL ATM Adaptation Layer

AB Access Burst

AbisPC Abis interface Port Control

ACCH Associated Control Channel

ACS Active Codec Set

AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation

AFC Automatic Frequency Correction

AGCH Access Grant Channel

AGT Agent

AICP A Interface Common Procedure

ALC Automatic Level Control

ALM Alarm

AMR Adaptive Multi Rate

AMRFS Adaptive Multi Rate Full Speed

AMRHS Adaptive Multi Rate Half Speed

ANR Automatic Noise Restraint

APM Advanced Power Module

APN Access Point Name

Page 191: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 191 of 203

APP Application

APS Automatic Protection Switchback

ARP Address Resolution Protocol

ARQ Automatic Request for retransmission

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

ATT Attach-Detach allowed

B

BA BCCH Allocation

BAM Back Administration Module

BBU Baseband Control Unit

BCCH Broadcast Control Channel

BEP Bit Error Probability

BER Bit Error Rate

BFD Bidirectional Forwarding Detection

BG Border Gateway

BIU Base station Interface Unit

BKP Backplane Board

BM Basic Module

BMACT Basic Module Active Codec Type

BMRC BM Resource Control

BOM Bill Of Materials

BQ Bad Quality

BR Backward Reporting

BSC Base Station Controller

BSCOM BSC O&M

BSIC Base Station Identity Code

BSSAP Base Station Subsystem Application Part

BSSAP+ Base Station Subsystem Application Part Plus

BSSGP Base Station System GPRS Protocol

BTS Base Transceiver Station

BTSCP BTS Common Processing

BTSOM BTS O&M

Page 192: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 192 of 203

BTSTRC BTS Transmission Resource Control

BVC BSSGP Virtual Connection

BVCI BSSGP Virtual Connection Identifier

C

CACS Common Active Codec Set

CAPEX Capital expenditures

CBC Cell Broadcast Center

CBCH Cell Broadcast CHannel

CBE Cell Broadcast Entity

CBIP Cell Broadcast Interface Process

CBSC CDMA2000 Base Station Controller

CCB Call Control Block

CCCH Common Control Channel

CCU Channel Codec Unit

CDB Cell Broadcast Database

CDU Combining and Distribution Unit

CECCM CEll CCM process

CECHM CEll Channel Management

CEGPRS Cell GPRS Processing

CELP Code-Excited LPC

CESP Cell Service Process

CGI Cell Global Identifier

CHR Call History Record

CI Cell Identify

CI Cell Identity

CIC Circuit identification code

CIU Circuit Interface Unit

CM Configuration Manage

CMI Codec Mode Indication

CMR Codec Mode Request

CPRI Common Protocol Radio Interface

CPUX Xpu CPU eXtended

Page 193: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 193 of 203

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

CRDLC Call Radio Link Control

CS Coding Scheme

CSD Circuit Switched Data

CV Countdown Value

CW Call Wait

D

DACS Distant Active Codec Set

DBAPI DataBase API

DBG Debug

DBMI DataBase Management Interface

DBUS Data-BUS

DCS 1800MHz Digital Cellular System 1800MHz

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Diffserv Differentiated Services

DOPRA Distributed Object-oriented Programmable Realtime Architecture

DPU Data Process Unit

DRFU Double Radio Filter Unit

DRX Discontinuous Reception

DSCP DiffServ Code Point

DSPC DSP for transCoder

DSPI DSP for Integrated

DSPOM DSP O&M

DSPOM_AGT DSP OM Agent

DSPP DSP for PCU

DT Debug Terminal

DTAP Direct Transfer Application Part

DTCB Distance To Cell Board

DTM Dual Transfer Mode

DTM Dual Transfer Mode

DTMF Dual-Tone Multi-frequency

DTX Discontinuous Transmission

Page 194: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 194 of 203

E

ECSD Enhanced Circuit Switched Data

ECT Explicit Call Transfer

EDA Extended Dynamic Allocation

EFR Enhanced Full Rate

EFR Enhanced Full Rate

E-GSM Extended GSM-900 Band (includes Standard GSM-900 band)

EICC Enhanced Interference Counteract Combining

EML Extended Operation and Maintenance Link

EM-layer Element Management-layer

eMLPP Enhanced multi-level precedence and preemption service

EMR Enhanced Measurement Report

ES Errored Second

ESL Extend Signaling Link

ESR Errored Second Ratio

ETHERNET

OAM

ETHERNET OAM

ETRAU EGPRS TRAU

F

FACCH Fast Associated Control Channel

FAI Final Ack Indicator

FBI Final Block Indicator

FCS Frame Check Sequence

FDR Frequency Domain Reflectometer

FE Fast Ethernet

FEC Forward Error Correction

FER Frame Erase Ratio

FER Frame Erase Ratio

FH Frequency Hopping

FIR Finite Input Response

Flex Abis Flex Abis

Page 195: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 195 of 203

FM Forward Monitoring

FN Frame Number

FR Frame Relay

FR Full Rate

FR AMR Full Rate AMR

FS Full Speed

FTP FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOL

FTPS FTP Over SSL

FUC Frame Unit Controller

G

Gb Gb interface

GBSC GSM Base Station Controller

GBSS GSM Base Station Subsystems

GDPUC GDPU for transCoder

GDPUX GDPU for eXtensible use

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GEHUB GSM E1/T1 High-Level Data Link Control

GEIUB GSM E1/T1 Interface Unit for aBis

GEPUG GSM E1/T1 Packet Unit for Gb

GFGUA GSM FE/GE electronic interface Unit for A

GFGUB GSM FE/GE electronic interface Unit for Abis

GFGUG GSM FE/GE electronic interface Unit for Gb

GGCU GSM General Clock Unit

GGOUA GSM GE optical interface Unit for A

GGOUB GSM GE optical interface Unit for Abis

GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying (modulation)

GOMU GSM Operation and Maintenance Unit

GPRS General Packet Radio Service

GPS Global Position System

GRFU GSM Radio Frequency Unit

GRLM GPRS Radio Link Management

GRRM GPRS Radio Resource management

Page 196: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 196 of 203

GSCU GSM Switching and Control Unit

GSM-R Railways Global System for Mobile Communication

GSN Gigabyte System Network

GTMU GSM Timing and Main control Unit

GTNU GSM TDM switching Network Unit

GTRAU GPRS TRAU

GTRAUE GPRS TRAU Enhancement

GTRAUIP GPRS TRAU IP transmission

GUI Graphical User Interface

GXPUM GSM eXtensible Processing Unit for Main service

H

HDLC High-Level Data Link Control

HLR Home Location Register

HMC High Multislot Classes

HR Half Rate

HR AMR Half Rate AMR

HS Half Speed

HSCSD High Speed Circuit Switched Data

HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol

HubBTS Hub Base Transceiver Station

I

IACS Immediate Active Codec Set

IBCA Interference Based Channel Allocation

ICB Inner Combiner bypass

ICC Interference Rejection Combining

ICMP Internet Control Messages Protocol

IDC Instance Distribution Control

IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identity

IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity

IP Internet Protocol

IR Incremental redundancy

Page 197: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 197 of 203

ISI Inter-Symbol Interference

IWF Interworking Function

K

KPI Key Performance Index

L

L3IF Layer-3 Interface

LA Link adaptation

LAC Location Area Code

LACS Local Active Codec Set

LAI Location Area Identity

LAN Local Area Network

LAPD Link Access Protocol on D channel

LLC Logic Link Control

LMT Local Maintenance Terminal

LRM Local Resource Management

M

M3UA MTP3 User Adaptation Layer

MA Mobile Allocation

MAC Medium Access Control

MACS Maximum number of Codes Modes in the Active Codec Set

MAIO Mobile Allocation Index Offset

MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme

MGW Media Gateway

MML Man-Machine Language

MNC Mobile Network Code

MOS Mean Opinion Scores

MPTY MultiParty

MR Measurement Report

MSC Main Switching Center

MSIC MS Instance Control

Page 198: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 198 of 203

MSIP MS Instance Processing

MSISDN Mobile Station International ISDN Number

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTLS Mapping and Transfer between LAPD entity and Service entity

MTP2 Message Transfer Part 2

MTP3 Message Transfer Part 3

MTSS Mapping and Transfer between SCCP entity and Service entity

N

NACC Network Assisted Cell Change

NAT Network Address Translation

NCH Notification Channel

NLN Notification List Number

NM Network Management

NMS Network Management System

NRI Network Resource Identifier

NS Network Service

NSE Network Service Entity

NSEI Network Service Entity Identifier

NSS Network Subsystem

NSVC Network Service Virtual Connection

O

OACS Optimized Active Codec Set

OMC Operations & Maintenance Centre

OML Operation and Maintenance Link

OPEX Operating Expense

P

PACCH Packet Associated Control Channel

PAGCH Packet Access Grant Channel

PARC Platform of Advanced Radio Controller

Pb PCU-BSC interface link

Page 199: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 199 of 203

PBCCH Packet Broadcast Control Channel

PBGT Power Budget Handover

PBIP Pb Interface Processing

PBT Power Boost Technology

PCCCH Packet Common Control Channel

PCH Paging Channel

PCM Pulse Code Modulation

PCS 1900MHz Personal Communications Service 1900MHz

PCU Packet Control Unit

PDCH Packet Data Channel

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PDTCH Packet Data Traffic Channel

PDU Power Distribution Unit

PGC Paging Control

P-GSM Primary GSM-900 Band

PIU Packet Interface Unit

PLMN Public Land Mobile Network

PMU Power Management Unit

PoC Push to Talk over Cellular

PPCH Packet Paging Channel

PQ Priority Queue

PRACH Packet Random Access Channel

PS Packet Switch Domain

PSI Packet SI Status

PSU Power Supply Unit

PT Payload Type

PTCCH Packet Timing Advanced Control Channel

P-TMSI Packet-Temporary Mobile Station Identity

PTP Point-To-Point

PTRAU Packet Transcoder/Rate Adaptor Unit

PTT Push-To-Talk

PTU Packet Transmission Unit

PVC Permanent Virtual Connection

Page 200: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 200 of 203

Q

QoS Quality of Service

QTRU Quadruple Transmission Receiver Unit

R

RACH Random Access Channel

RC Resource control & Common procedure

RFC Request for Comments

RFU Radio Frequency Unit

RIM Reference Information Manager

RLC Radio Link Control

RNC WCDMA Radio Network Controller

RPE-LTP Regular Pulse Excitation-Long Term Prediction

RQI Radio Quality Indicator

RR Radio Resources

RRBP Relative Reserved Block Period

RSL Radio Signaling Link

RTCP Real-Time Transport Control Protocol

RTP Real-Time Transport Protocol

RX Reception

S

SACCH Slow Associated Control Channel

SAIC Single Antenna Interference Cancellation

SAPI Service Access Point Identifier

SCCP Signaling Connection Control Part

SCH Synchronization Channel

SCTP Stream Control Transmission Protocol

SCU Switch Control Unit

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SESR Severely Errored Second Ratio

SGSN Serving GPRS Support Node

SID Silence Descriptor

Page 201: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 201 of 203

SIGTRAN Signaling Transport

SMC Short Message Centre

SMLC Serving Mobile Location Center

SMS Short Message Service

SMSCB Short Message Service Cell Broadcast

SONET Synchronous Optical Network

SP Service Provider

SPHY Single PHY

SSL Security Socket Layer

STP Signaling Transfer Point

T

TA Timing Advanced

TBF Temporary Block Flow

TC TransCoder

TCEC The TRAN Circuit Emulation Card

TCH Traffic Channel

TCHF Traffic Channel Full rate

TCP/IP Transfer Control Protocol /Internet Protocol

TD-SCDMA Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access

TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier

TFI Temporary Block Flow Identifier

TFO Tandem Free Operation

TGPU TRAN GBTS Package Process Unit

THP Traffic handle Priority

TLLI Temporary link level identity

TLS Transport Layer Security

TMN Telecommunication Management Network

TMSI Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identifier

TMU Timing/transmission and Management Unit

TNU TDM switching network unit

TOP TDM Over Packet

TPEC The TRAN Packet over E1/T1 Card

Page 202: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 202 of 203

TRAU Transcoder & Rate Adaptation Unit

TRAUE TRAU Enhancement

TRAUIP TRAU IP transmission

TRC Trace

TrFO Transcoder Free Operation

TRM Transport Resource Management

TRU Transmission Receiver Unit

TRX Transceiver

TSU TDM switching network unit

TSYN TRAU Synchronization Unit

U

UDP User Datagram Protocol

UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System

UOIP User traffic Data Over IP

UOP User Traffic Data Over Packet

USCU Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit

USF Uplink Status Flag

V

VAD Voice Activity Detector

VBS Voice Broadcast Service

VGCS Voice Group Call Service

VISP Versatile IP and Secure Platform

VLAN Virtual LAN

VLR Visitor Location Register

VoIP Voice over IP

VPN Virtual Private Network

VQI Voice Quality Index

W

WAN Wide Area Network

WBBP WCDMA Baseband Processing unit

Page 203: GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS14.0 Basic Feature Description Public

Issue 02(2012-06-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 203 of 203

WCDMA Wideband CDMA

WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing

WMPT WCDMA Main Processing Transmission unit

WRED Weighted Random Early Detection

WRR Weighted Round Robin

X

XPUX XPU eXtended